Catch up on 2-months of updates

tn_1CO.tsv

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 1:2	e75p			ἡγιασμένοις ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “sanctified” refers to people whom God has reserved to honor him. Alternate translation: “to those whom Christ Jesus has set apart for God” or “to those whom God has set apart for himself because they belong to Christ Jesus”
 1:2	e8jw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ οὔσῃ & κλητοῖς ἁγίοις	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has called to be holy people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:2	l21m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τοῖς ἐπικαλουμένοις τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The word “name” here is a metonym for person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “who call on the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:2	l9rq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	αὐτῶν καὶ ἡμῶν	1	The word “ours” includes Paul’s audience. Jesus is the Lord of Paul and the Corinthians and all the churches. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:2	l9rq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	αὐτῶν καὶ ἡμῶν	1	The word “ours” includes Paul’s audience. Jesus is the Lord of Paul and the Corinthians and all the churches. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	gc2b				0	Paul and Sosthenes wrote this letter to the Christians who belonged to the church in Corinth.
 1:3	gc2c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Unless otherwise noted, such words as “you” and “your” refer to Paul’s audience and so are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 1:4	pt1r				0	Paul describes the believer’s position and fellowship in Christ as they wait for his coming.
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 1:28	gj19			μὴ ὄντα, ἵνα τὰ ὄντα καταργήσῃ	1	“nothing. He did this so he could show that the things that are held as valuable are really worthless”
 1:28	f11p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὰ μὴ ὄντα	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “things that people think are worth money” or “things that people think are worth respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:30	fmr3			ἐξ αὐτοῦ	1	This refers to the work of Christ on the cross.
-1:30	a7bs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῖν	1	These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:30	a7bs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:30	f1at		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1	Possible meanings are (1) “Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is” or (2) “Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1:31	fym9			ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1	“If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is”
 2:intro	k86p				0	# 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Wisdom\nPaul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
@@ -97,11 +97,11 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 2:11	h4p8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ?	1	Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows what a person is thinking except the person himself. Alternate translation: “No one knows what a person is thinking except that person’s spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 2:11	i47d			τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου	1	This refers to a person’s inner being, his own spiritual nature.
 2:11	gw3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “only the Spirit of God knows the deep things of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-2:12	zbv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “we” includes both Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:12	zbv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” includes both Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:12	n1c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that God freely gave to us” or “that God has kindly given us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2:13	u797			ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος, πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες	1	The Holy Spirit communicates God’s truth to believers in the Spirit’s own words and gives them his own wisdom.
 2:13	yg45			ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος, πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες	1	“The Spirit explains uses his own spiritual wisdom to explain spiritual words”
-2:14	cve2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “we” includes both Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:14	cve2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” includes both Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:14	hq3u			ψυχικὸς & ἄνθρωπος	1	the non-Christian person, who has not received the Holy Spirit
 2:14	gwe3			ὅτι πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1	“because understanding these things requires the aid of the Spirit”
 2:15	w4q7			ὁ & πνευματικὸς	1	“The believer who has received the Spirit”
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 6:2	i67f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	καὶ εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος, ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?	1	Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “you will judge the world in the future, so you should be able to settle this matter now.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 6:3	h374			βιωτικά	1	“stop arguments about things that have to do with this life”
 6:3	us55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν	1	Paul is surprised that they do not seem to know. Alternate translation: “You know that we will judge the angels.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-6:3	v5r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	κρινοῦμεν	1	Paul includes himself and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+6:3	v5r5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κρινοῦμεν	1	Paul includes himself and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 6:3	x6h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μήτι γε βιωτικά?	1	Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “Because we know we will judge the angels, we can also be sure that God will enable us to judge matters in this life.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 6:4	vw5t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	Possible meanings are (1) this is a rhetorical question or (2) this is a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers” or (3) this is a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 6:4	xn32			βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	“If you are called upon to make decisions about daily life” or “If you must settle matters that are important in this life”
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 7:17	iid2			οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι	1	Paul was teaching believers in all the churches to act in this manner.
 7:18	unc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	περιτετμημένος τις ἐκλήθη?	1	Paul was addressing the circumcised ones (the Jews). Alternate translation: “To the circumcised ones, when God called you to believe, you had already been circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 7:18	fqv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις?	1	Paul was now addressing the uncircumcised ones. Alternate translation: “To the uncircumcised ones, when God called you to believe, you were not circumcised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-7:20	yy8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the words “us” and “we” refer to all Christians and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+7:20	yy8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “us” and “we” refer to all Christians and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 7:20	hsz1			ἐν τῇ κλήσει & μενέτω	1	Here “calling” refers to the work or social position in which you were involved. Alternate translation: “live and work as you did”
 7:21	ag5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἐκλήθης & σοι & δύνασαι	1	Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of “you” and the command “be” here are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 7:21	nli9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	δοῦλος ἐκλήθης? μή σοι μελέτω	1	This can be stated as a statement. Alternate translation: “To those who were slaves when God called you to believe, I say this: do not be concerned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 7:40	hd7f			μακαριωτέρα	1	more contented, more joyful
 7:40	pse4			οὕτως μείνῃ	1	“remains unmarried”
 8:intro	c8l6				0	# 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idols\nPaul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
-8:1	jf6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	“We” means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+8:1	jf6h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	“We” means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 8:1	nzt4				0	Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ.
 8:1	cep1			περὶ δὲ	1	Paul uses this phrase to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him.
 8:1	g5t3			τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων	1	Gentile worshipers would offer grain, fish, fowl, or meat, to their gods. The priest would burn a portion of it on the altar. Paul is speaking of the portion the priest would give back for the worshiper to eat or sell in the market.
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 8:1	an8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀγάπη οἰκοδομεῖ	1	Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. Alternate translation: “love strengthens people” or “when we love people, we strengthen them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 8:2	qbh9			δοκεῖ ἐγνωκέναι τι	1	“believes he knows everything about something”
 8:3	etd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἔγνωσται ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God knows that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-8:4	v4gx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	“We” and “us” here refer to all believers and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+8:4	v4gx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	“We” and “us” here refer to all believers and include Paul’s audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 8:4	y3ee		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἴδαμεν ὅτι οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κόσμῳ, καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς Θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς	1	Paul is probably quoting phrases that some Corinthians used. Being “nothing” represents having no power. Alternate translation: “We all know, as you yourselves like to say, that an idol in this world has no power and that there is no God but one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 8:5	sl8j			λεγόμενοι θεοὶ	1	“things that people call gods”
 8:5	l7ib			θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί	1	Paul does not believe that many gods and many lords exist, but he recognizes that the pagans believe they do.
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 9:27	blb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μή & αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι	1	This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: “the judge will not disqualify me” or “God will not say that I have failed to obey the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 10:intro	abcd				0	# 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”\n\nIn this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
 10:1	r66h				0	Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers’ experiences with immorality and idolatry.
-10:1	g34f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word “our” refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+10:1	g34f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word “our” refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 10:1	v4c6			διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον	1	This sea is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds.
 10:1	z5s9			διὰ & διῆλθον	1	“walked through” or “traveled through”
 10:2	f7cq			πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο	1	“All followed and were committed to Moses”
@@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 10:10	nye7			γογγύζετε	1	complaining
 10:10	i3q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “did. As a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 10:11	u1mp			ταῦτα & συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις	1	“God punished our ancestors”
-10:11	wmp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τυπικῶς	1	Here “us” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+10:11	wmp1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τυπικῶς	1	Here “us” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 10:11	j3z1			τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων	1	“the last days”
 10:12	df2p			μὴ πέσῃ	1	does not sin or reject God
 10:13	a8vj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος	1	This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ front:intro	e8ey				0	# Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 16:9	fyj3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	θύρα & ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη	1	Paul speaks of the opportunity God has given him to win people to the gospel as if it were a door that God had opened so he could walk through it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 16:10	p6vb			βλέπετε ἵνα ἀφόβως γένηται πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	“see that he has no cause to fear being with you”
 16:11	f4mw			μή τις & αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ	1	Because Timothy was much younger than Paul, sometimes he was not shown the respect he deserved as a minister of the gospel.
-16:12	is6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	Ἀπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+16:12	is6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Ἀπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 16:13	p2la		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	γρηγορεῖτε, στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει, ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε	1	Paul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he was giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 16:13	ng8n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	Paul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. This can be stated more clearly. Alternate translation: “Be careful whom you trust” or “Watch out for danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 16:13	uys8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. Possible meanings are (1) “keep strongly believing what we have taught you” or (2) “keep strongly trusting in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

tn_1KI.tsv

@@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ front:intro	h5yn				0	# Introduction to 1 Kings\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 20:22	b52i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	“Yourself” represents by metonymy the army of the king. Alternate translation: “strengthen your forces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 20:22	g9f7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet		0	These two words mean basically the same thing and are combined for emphasis. Alternate translation: “determine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 20:22	u4ju				0	Possible meanings are (1) “in the springtime of next year” or (2) “at this time next year.”
-20:23	kn8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The words “us” and “we” refer to the servants, the king, and the army all together. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+20:23	kn8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “us” and “we” refer to the servants, the king, and the army all together. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 20:24	alj2				0	“You must remove the thirty-two kings who are leading your troops”
 20:26	ewh9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names		0	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 20:26	h5fl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche		0	“Israel” represents the army of Israel. Alternate translation: “to fight against the army of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

tn_1PE.tsv

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ front:intro	c1uv				0	# Introduction to 1 Peter\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:2	i9kf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here “the blood” refers to the death of Jesus. Just as Moses sprinkled blood on the people of Israel to symbolize their covenant with God, believers are in covenant with God because of Jesus’ death. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:2	z7df		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη	1	This passage speaks of grace as if it were an object that believers could possess, and of peace as if it were something that could increase in amount. Of course, grace is in reality the kind way God acts toward believers, and peace is how believers live in safety and joy with God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:3	y6aq				0	Peter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. Here he elaborates on a metaphor in which what God promises to do for all believers is spoken of as if it were an inheritance that he passes on to them.
-1:3	cyf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ & ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς	1	The words “our” and “us” refer to Peter and those to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	cyf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ & ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς	1	The words “our” and “us” refer to Peter and those to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	c92y			ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς	1	“he has caused us to be born again”
 1:4	b2zy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς κληρονομίαν	1	You can translate this using a verb. Alternate translation: “We confidently expect to receive an inheritance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:4	cy1g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κληρονομίαν	1	Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

tn_1SA.tsv

@@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ front:intro	z2ar				0	# Introduction to 1 Samuel\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 26:10	c39s				0	“as certainly as Yahweh lives” or “as surely as Yahweh lives”
 26:10	s6yk				0	“he will die a natural death”
 26:11	gt6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	The hand is a metonym for the harm a hand can do. Alternate translation: “do anything to harm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-26:11	q6ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	David includes Abishai, so the word “us” here is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+26:11	q6ty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	David includes Abishai, so the word “us” here is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 26:12	mj5c				0	Yahweh had caused them to sleep deeply.
 26:14	qg15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		0	David uses a question to shame Abner into answering. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Answer me, Abner!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 26:14	i2zz				0	“David spoke as loudly as he could” so Saul and his men could hear him

tn_1TH.tsv

@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ front:intro	jp2y				0	# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 1:10	dg6a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ	1	This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 1:10	pmi8			ὃν ἤγειρεν	1	“whom God caused to live again”
 1:10	wba8			ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν	1	“so that he was no longer dead.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
-1:10	pt1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς	1	Here Paul includes the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:10	pt1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς	1	Here Paul includes the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:intro	kt5l				0	# 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Christian witness\nPaul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
 2:1	pt75				0	Paul defines the believers’ service and reward.
 2:1	gpr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ	1	The words “you” and “yourselves” refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ front:intro	jp2y				0	# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 3:10	k71n			ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ	1	“fervently”
 3:10	eb26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον	1	The word “face” refers to their whole person. Alternate translation: “visit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 3:11	tet9				0	In these verses, the word “our” does not always refer to the same group of people. Please see the translation notes for specifics.
-3:11	bql9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ὁ Θεὸς & Πατὴρ ἡμῶν	1	Paul includes the Thessalonian believers with his ministry team. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:11	bql9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὁ Θεὸς & Πατὴρ ἡμῶν	1	Paul includes the Thessalonian believers with his ministry team. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:11	mc2m			ὁ Θεὸς & ἡμῶν	1	“We pray that our God”
 3:11	um1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Paul speaks as if he wants God to show him and his companions the route to take to visit the Thessalonian Christians. He means that he wants God to make it possible for them to do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:11	efl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	The word “our” refers to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy but not the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ front:intro	jp2y				0	# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 4:6	q7bf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔκδικος Κύριος	1	This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish the one who transgressed and will defend the one who was wronged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 4:6	d1ip			προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα	1	“told you beforehand and strongly warned against”
 4:7	v3np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “God called us to cleanness and holiness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-4:7	q4tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οὐ & ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	The word “us” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:7	q4tj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὐ & ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς	1	The word “us” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:8	mn5y			ὁ ἀθετῶν	1	“whoever disregards this teaching” or “whoever ignores this teaching”
 4:8	su51			ἀθετῶν, οὐκ ἄνθρωπον ἀθετεῖ, ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν	1	Paul stresses that this teaching is not from man, but from God.
 4:9	uxn8			τῆς φιλαδελφίας	1	“love for fellow believers”
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ front:intro	jp2y				0	# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 4:13	r9f8			ἵνα μὴ λυπῆσθε, καθὼς & οἱ λοιποὶ	1	“because we do not want you grieve like the rest”
 4:13	qt5b			λυπῆσθε	1	mourn, be sad about something
 4:13	rl73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς & οἱ λοιποὶ, οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα	1	“like people who do not confidence in the future promise.” It can be stated clearly what those people do not have confidence about. Alternate translation: “like the people who are not sure that they will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-4:14	ybz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	εἰ & πιστεύομεν	1	Here “we” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:14	ybz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἰ & πιστεύομεν	1	Here “we” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:14	kmk2			ἀνέστη	1	“rose to live again”
 4:14	bi9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Here “fallen asleep” is a polite way to refer to having died. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 4:15	ni3m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου	1	“Word” here is a metonym for “message.” Alternate translation: “by means of understanding the teachings of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ front:intro	jp2y				0	# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 4:16	ah7p			αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος & καταβήσεται	1	“the Lord himself will come down”
 4:16	z9ka			ἀρχαγγέλου	1	“the chief angel”
 4:16	dr89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον	1	The “dead in Christ” are those believers who have passed away. Alternate translation: “those who believe in Jesus Christ, but who have already died, will rise first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-4:17	l5l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες	1	Here “we” refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:17	l5l1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες	1	Here “we” refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:17	wvi8			σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	The word “them” refers to the dead believers who were made alive again.
 4:17	se1y			ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα	1	“meet the Lord Jesus in the sky”
 5:intro	ay3d				0	# 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Day of the Lord\nThe exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Quench the Spirit\nThis means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work.
@@ -174,11 +174,11 @@ front:intro	jp2y				0	# Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 5:5	zp3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας	1	Paul speaks of the truth as if it were light and day. Alternate translation: “For you know the truth, like people who live in the light, like people during the day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:5	d6fm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους	1	Paul speaks of evil and ignorance about God as if they were darkness. Alternate translation: We are not unknowing, like people who live in the darkness, like people at night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:6	us6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί	1	Paul speaks of spiritual unawareness as if it were sleep. Alternate translation: “let us not be like others who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-5:6	gu51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	καθεύδωμεν	1	The word “us” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:6	gu51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καθεύδωμεν	1	The word “us” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:6	d2aj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν	1	Paul describes spiritual awareness as the opposite of sleep and drunkenness. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:7	s253		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν	1	Just as when people sleep and do not know what is happening, so the people of this world do not know that Christ will return. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:7	exa8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν	1	Paul is stating that it is at night when people become drunk, so when people are unaware of Christ’s return they do not live a self-controlled life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-5:8	zj9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	In verses 8-10 the word “we” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:8	zj9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	In verses 8-10 the word “we” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:8	wh3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & ἡμέρας ὄντες	1	Paul speaks of knowing the truth about God as belonging to the day. Alternate translation: “we know the truth” or “we have received the light of truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:8	i8j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νήφωμεν	1	Paul compares being sober to exercising self-control. Alternate translation: “let us exercise self-control” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:8	ev6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης	1	As a soldier would put on a breastplate to protect his body, a believer who lives by faith and love will find protection. Alternate translation: “protect ourselves with faith and love” or “protect ourselves by trusting Christ and loving him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

tn_1TI.tsv

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
 front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy\n\nIn this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.\n\n1. Greetings (1:1-2)\n2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)\n3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)\n4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)\n5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)\n6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)\n7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)\n8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)\n9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)\n10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)\n11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)\n12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?\n\nA man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?\n\nPaul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is discipleship?\n\nDiscipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?\n\nIn [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1:intro	a4v2				0	# 1 Timothy 01 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual children\nIn this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.”
+1:intro	a4v2				0	# 1 Timothy 01 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual children\nIn this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.”
 1:1	i3zz			Παῦλος	1	In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy”
 1:1	xl6d			κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ	1	Alternate translation: “by the authority of God”
 1:1	wb8j			Θεοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	Alternate translation: “God, who saves us”
-1:1	sw77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῆς ἐλπίδος ἡμῶν	1	Here, **our hope** refers figuratively to the person in whom we have hope. Alternate translations: “Christ Jesus, the one in whom we have confidence {for the future}” or “Christ Jesus, whom we trust {to save us}” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:1	sw77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῆς ἐλπίδος ἡμῶν	1	Here, **our hope** refers figuratively to the person in whom we have hope. Alternate translations: “Christ Jesus, the one in whom we have confidence” or “Christ Jesus, whom we trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1:2	pyi6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γνησίῳ τέκνῳ	1	Paul speaks of his close relationship to Timothy as though they were father and son. This shows Paul’s sincere love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul personally led Timothy to trust in Christ. That would be another reason why Paul considered him to be like his own child, since Timothy entered his new life as a follower of Jesus because of Paul. Alternate translation: “who is truly like a son to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:2	rd5v			χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη	1	In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Alternate translation: “I hope you are experiencing God’s kindness, mercy, and peace”
 1:2	p4lz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1	Here, **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God, who is our Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:7	t131		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ & μήτε & μήτε	1	Paul uses a triple negative in Greek for emphasis here, “not … neither … nor.” None of these negatives cancel each other to create a positive meaning. Instead, the negative meaning is retained throughout. If your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1:7	t132		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἃ λέγουσιν, μήτε περὶ τίνων διαβεβαιοῦνται	1	These two phrases mean similar things. Paul uses the repetition for emphasis. You do not need to put both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that they say so confidently are true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1:8	d6dz			οἴδαμεν δὲ ὅτι καλὸς ὁ νόμος	1	Alternate translations: “we understand that the law is useful” or “we understand that the law is beneficial”
-1:8	t134		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	In this letter, Paul uses the words **we**, **us,** and **our** to refer either to Timothy and himself, or else to all believers, which would also include the two of them. So generally, these words include the addressee. A note will discuss the one possible exception in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:8	t134		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν	1	In this letter, Paul uses the words **we**, **us,** and **our** to refer either to Timothy and himself, or else to all believers, which would also include the two of them. So generally, these words include the addressee. A note will discuss the one possible exception in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:8	r86g			ἐάν τις αὐτῷ νομίμως χρῆται	1	Alternate translations: “if a person uses it correctly” or “if a person uses it in the way that God intended”
 1:9	xs94			εἰδὼς τοῦτο	1	Alternate translation: “we also know this”
 1:9	fq4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαίῳ νόμος οὐ κεῖται	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God did not make the law for people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:20	ty7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them to Satan. If this does not make sense in your language, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:20	az10		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1:20	s76c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα παιδευθῶσι	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God may teach them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-2:intro	c6rf				0	# 1 Timothy 02 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Peace\nPaul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.\n\n### Women in the church\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
+2:intro	c6rf				0	# 1 Timothy 02 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Peace\nPaul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.\n\n### Women in the church\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
 2:1	yk2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	πρῶτον πάντων	1	As in [1:15](../01/15.md), the term **first** figuratively means the superlative example of a class. Alternate translation: “most importantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2:1	iag7			παρακαλῶ	1	Alternate translation: “I encourage” or “I exhort”
 2:1	ql7a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ποιεῖσθαι δεήσεις, προσευχάς, ἐντεύξεις, εὐχαριστίας	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action and who would receive the action. Alternate translation: “I urge all believers to make requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 2:15	gh3c			ἐὰν μείνωσιν	1	Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living”
 2:15	sl57		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2:15	dcf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	μετὰ σωφροσύνης	1	Possible meanings of this expression here are: (1) “with good judgment,” (2) “with modesty,” or (3) “with clear thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-3:intro	d9db				0	# 1 Timothy 03 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\n[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.\n\n### Overseers and deacons\nThe church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.\n\n### Character qualities\nThis chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:intro	d9db				0	# 1 Timothy 03 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.\n\n### Overseers and deacons\nThe church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.\n\n### Character qualities\nThis chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 3:1	t227			πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
 3:1	t228		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks	πιστὸς ὁ λόγος	1	Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 3:1	t229		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	ἐπισκοπῆς	1	This term describes a leader of the early Christian church whose work was to take care of the spiritual needs of believers and make sure that they received accurate biblical teaching. Alternate translation: “spiritual leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:9	hc1t			καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος	1	See how you translated this in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it”
 4:10	l2yl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ	1	The term **this** refers to “godliness,” which Paul mentions in the previous two verses. Paul is giving a reason why Timothy should believe the saying about the value of godliness. He and his other fellow workers are striving very hard to become godly, so it must be valuable. Alternate translation: “after all, it is for godliness that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 4:10	c9db		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοπιῶμεν καὶ ἀγωνιζόμεθα	1	The terms **toil** and **struggle** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize the intensity with which he and his fellow workers are serving God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “we work so hard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-4:10	t320		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	κοπιῶμεν καὶ ἀγωνιζόμεθα	1	This could be the one place where **we** does not include the addressee. Paul has just told Timothy to make godliness his priority rather than physical exercise, and he may be offering himself and his other fellow workers as an example of that for Timothy to follow. So if your language makes that distinction, you may wish to use the exclusive form in this phrase. However, **we** in the next phrase would include Timothy, since Paul is encouraging Timothy to join him and his fellow workers in making godliness his priority as someone who, like them, has hoped in the living God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:10	t320		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κοπιῶμεν καὶ ἀγωνιζόμεθα	1	This could be the one place where **we** does not include the addressee. Paul has just told Timothy to make godliness his priority rather than physical exercise, and he may be offering himself and his other fellow workers as an example of that for Timothy to follow. So if your language makes that distinction, you may wish to use the exclusive form in this phrase. However, **we** in the next phrase would include Timothy, since Paul is encouraging Timothy to join him and his fellow workers in making godliness his priority as someone who, like them, has hoped in the living God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:10	qmj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	Θεῷ ζῶντι	1	See how you translated this in [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translations: “the God who is genuinely alive” or “the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 4:10	t322		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 4:12	qi8l			μηδείς σου τῆς νεότητος καταφρονείτω	1	The term **despise** here does not mean “hate,” but “think little of” or “scorn.” Alternate translation: “Do not let anyone disrespect you just because you are young”
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:13	t326		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρόσεχε τῇ ἀναγνώσει, τῇ παρακλήσει, τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what Timothy is to read and to whom, and whom he is to exhort and teach. Alternate translation: “continue reading the Scriptures to the people in the church there, exhorting them, and teaching them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 4:13	kky7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρόσεχε τῇ ἀναγνώσει, τῇ παρακλήσει, τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract nouns **reading**, **exhortation**, and **teaching** with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “continue reading the Scriptures to the people in your meeting there, exhorting them, and teaching them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:14	i1ka		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ἀμέλει	1	You can state this in a positive way if that is more natural for your language. Alternate translations: “continue to use” or “make sure you develop” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-4:14	t221		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀμέλει τοῦ ἐν σοὶ χαρίσματος	1	Paul speaks of Timothy as if he were a container that could hold God’s gift. Alternate translation: “do not neglect the ability that God has given you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+4:14	t22x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μὴ ἀμέλει τοῦ ἐν σοὶ χαρίσματος	1	Paul speaks of Timothy as if he were a container that could hold God’s gift. Alternate translation: “do not neglect the ability that God has given you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:14	hdd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ ἀμέλει τοῦ ἐν σοὶ χαρίσματος	1	The implication is that this **gift** is the ability that God has given Timothy for ministry. Alternate translation: “do not neglect the ability that God has given you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 4:14	xp1k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃ ἐδόθη σοι διὰ προφητείας	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “which you received when leaders of the church prophesied about you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:14	rr8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τοῦ πρεσβυτερίου	1	Paul is speaking of a ceremony during which the church leaders put their hands on Timothy and prayed that God would enable him to do the work he had commanded him to do. Alternate translation: “when the elders all laid their hands on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ front:intro	wy83				0	# Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 6:1	nm4n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅσοι εἰσὶν ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι	1	Paul speaks of people who work as slaves as though they were oxen plowing or pulling with a yoke around their necks. Alternate translation: “concerning people who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:1	ep1l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσοι εἰσὶν	1	The implication in context is that Paul is speaking about believers who are slaves. Alternate translation: “believers who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 6:1	he2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will not insult God’s character or what we believe and teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-6:1	e3ce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will always speak respectfully about God’s character and about the things that we teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+6:1	e3ce			ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will always speak respectfully about God’s character and about the things that we teach”
 6:1	xb92		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Alternate translations: “God’s character” or “God’s reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 6:1	f5pc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡ διδασκαλία	1	Implicitly Paul means the teaching about Jesus and about how his followers should live. Alternate translation: “our teaching about how believers should live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 6:2	fvv7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί εἰσιν	1	Here, **brothers** figuratively means fellow believers in Jesus, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “they are fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

tn_2CO.tsv

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ front:intro	ur4j				0	# Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 1:3	k7dl			ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ	1	“God, who is the Father”
 1:3	pg4a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως	1	These two phrases express the same idea in two different ways. Both phrases refer to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1:3	blv4			ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως	1	Possible meanings are (1) that the words “mercies” and “all comfort” describe the character of “Father” and “God” or (2) that the words “Father” and “God” refer to one who is the source of “mercies” and “all comfort.”
-1:4	n2lc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν	1	Here “us” and “our” include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:4	n2lc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν	1	Here “us” and “our” include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:5	nn5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Paul speaks of Christ’s sufferings as if they were objects that could increase in number. Alternate translation: “For just as Christ suffered greatly for our sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:5	i254			τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Possible meanings are (1) that this refers to the suffering that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ or (2) that this refers to the suffering that Christ experienced on their behalf.
 1:5	tg9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν	1	Paul speaks of comfort as if it were an object that could increase in size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ front:intro	ur4j				0	# Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 3:15	gwp9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται	1	Here the word “hearts” represents what people think, and the people being unable to understand the old covenant is spoken of as if they have a veil that covers their hearts the way a physical veil would cover their eyes. Alternate translation: “they are unable to understand what they are hearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:16	k2dr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡνίκα & ἐὰν ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον	1	Here “turns to” is a metaphor that means to become loyal to someone. Alternate translation: “when a person starts to worship the Lord” or “when a person starts to trust in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:16	w1y2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα	1	God gives them the ability to understand. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God lifts the veil away” or “God gives them the ability to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-3:18	r6rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμεῖς δὲ πάντες	1	Here the word “us” refers to all believers, including Paul and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:18	r6rx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς δὲ πάντες	1	Here the word “us” refers to all believers, including Paul and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:18	l3xw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι	1	Unlike the Israelites who could not see God’s glory reflected on Moses’ face because he had covered it with a veil, there is nothing to prevent believers from seeing and understanding God’s glory. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:18	rc9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα	1	The Spirit is changing believers to be glorious like him. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The Lord is transforming us into his same glorious likeness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:18	bx5b			ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν	1	“from one amount of glory to another amount of glory.” This means that the Spirit is constantly increasing the glory of believers.
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ front:intro	ur4j				0	# Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 5:20	q9u9			Χριστοῦ οὖν πρεσβεύομεν	1	“those who speak for Christ”
 5:20	a6fx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 5:21	jp2a			τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν	1	“God made Christ become the sacrifice for our sin”
-5:21	hz6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς	1	Here the words “our” and “we” are inclusive and refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:21	hz6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς	1	Here the words “our” and “we” are inclusive and refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:21	ebz2			τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν	1	“Christ is the one who never sinned”
 5:21	zm9e			δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	“God did this…the righteousness of God in Christ”
 5:21	kmt9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	The phrase “the righteousness of God” refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: “so that we might have God’s righteousness in us through Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ front:intro	ur4j				0	# Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 6:15	rm3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Βελιάρ	1	This is another name for the devil. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 6:15	z9iv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου?	1	This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. Alternate translation: “A believer shares nothing in common with an unbeliever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 6:16	y99x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων?	1	This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. Alternate translation: “There is no agreement between the temple of God and idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-6:16	s3l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς γὰρ ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος	1	Paul refers to all Christians as forming a temple for God to dwell in. Alternate translation: “we are like a temple where the living God dwells” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+6:16	s3l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς γὰρ ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος	1	Paul refers to all Christians as forming a temple for God to dwell in. Alternate translation: “we are like a temple where the living God dwells” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 6:16	u5g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω	1	This is an Old Testament quotation speaks of God being with the people in two different ways. The words “dwell among” speak of living where others live, while the words “walk among” speak of being with them as they go about their lives. Alternate translation: “I will be with them and help them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:17	fe1z				0	Paul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel.
 6:17	z5ld		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀφορίσθητε	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “set yourselves apart” or “allow me to set you apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ front:intro	ur4j				0	# Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n## Part 1: General Introd
 7:3	bhb7			πρὸς κατάκρισιν οὐ λέγω	1	“I do not say this to accuse you of having done wrong.” The word “this” refers to what Paul just said about not having wronged anyone.
 7:3	fay3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε	1	Paul speaks of his and his associates’ great love for the Corinthians as if they held them in their hearts. Alternate translation: “you are very dear to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 7:3	xzg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν	1	This means that Paul and his associates will continue to love the Corinthians no matter what happens. Alternate translation: “whether we live or whether we die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-7:3	jt6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν	1	“us” includes the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+7:3	jt6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν	1	“us” includes the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 7:4	mh12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You fill me with comfort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 7:4	mx9b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ	1	Paul speaks of joy as if it is a liquid that fills him until he overflows. Alternate translation: “I am extremely joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 7:4	mr75			ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν	0	“despite all our hardships”

tn_2JN.tsv

@@ -1,53 +1,64 @@
 Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
-front:intro	vpa9				0	# Introduction to 2 John\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 John\n\n1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)\n2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)\n3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)\n4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?\n\nThe author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John probably wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.\n\n### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?\n\nThe author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). This could refer to a specific woman and her children. Or it could refer figuratively to a specific group of believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### What is the book of 2 John about?\n\nJohn addressed this letter to someone he called “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). This could refer to a specific friend and her children. Or it could refer to a specific group of believers or to believers in general. John’s purpose in writing this letter was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.\n\n### Who were the people John spoke against?\n\nThe people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think God could become human. Therefore, they believed Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?\n\nIn [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most modern versions prefer and say “our joy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1:1	uspy			ὁ πρεσβύτερος	1	In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter”
-1:1	z4tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ πρεσβύτερος	1	**The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as “elder” either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:1	y7hw			ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς	1	In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children”
-1:1	a9w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ	1	**Chosen lady** could mean one of two things. (1) John may be writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as “lady.” (2) John may be writing to a congregation and figuratively describing the group of believers as a “lady.” Alternate translation: “to the chosen group of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:1	ueev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ	1	In this context, the term **chosen** likely indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “to the Christian lady” or “to the group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:1	xiil		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κυρίᾳ	1	Some interpreters understand this to be a proper name. Alternate translation: “Kyria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:1	axty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς	1	This could mean one of three things. (1) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it could mean her biological children. (2) John may be referring figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “and the people whom she has led to faith in Jesus” (3) This could be referring figuratively to the people who are part of a congregation. Alternate translation: “and the believers in that group” (For the second and third possibilities, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+front:intro	vpa9				0	# Introduction to 2 John\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 John\n\n1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)\n2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)\n3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)\n4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?\n\nThe author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.\n\n### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?\n\nThe author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### What is the book of 2 John about?\n\nIt appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.\nHe probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.\n\n### Who were the people John spoke against?\n\nThe people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?\n\nIn [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1:1	uspy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ πρεσβύτερος	1	In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1:1	z4tk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὁ πρεσβύτερος	1	**The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as “elder” either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:1	y7hw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς	1	In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1:1	a9w3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ	1	There are two possibilities for the meaning of **chosen lady**. (1) John is writing to a church and figuratively describing the group of believers as a “lady.” (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John may be writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as “lady.” Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:1	ueev		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ	1	In this context, the term **chosen** indicates a person or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “to the congregation that God has saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:1	axty		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς	1	There are three possibilities for the meaning of **her children**. (1) Just as **chosen lady** figuratively refers to a church, here **her children** refers figuratively to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it could refer to her biological children, or (3) it could refer figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:1	src4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. This could mean one of two things. (1) The phrase **the truth** describes how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) The phrase **the truth** provides the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:1	a50f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἐγνωκότες τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	John uses the phrase **all who have known the truth** to refer to believers who know and accept the true message about Jesus Christ. John is most likely using the term **all** as a generalization to mean all the believers who are with him and who know the lady. Alternate translation: “all who are with me who know the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1:1	a50f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἐγνωκότες τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	John uses the phrase **all who have known the truth** to refer to believers who know and accept the true message about Jesus Christ. John is most likely using the term **all** as a generalization to mean all the believers who are with him and who know the people of this church. Alternate translation: “all who are with me and who know and accept the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1:2	spdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	John uses the abstract noun **truth** to refer to the true message that Christians believe. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the true message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:2	et6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν	1	If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to himself and to “the lady” and “her children.” The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:2	et6b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν	1	If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to both himself and to the recipients of the letter. The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:2	a7rm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “for all time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:3	gad9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace** with verbal phrases, with **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and Jesus Christ show us kindness, be merciful to us, and give us peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:3	zfgr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη	1	In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipients before introducing the main business of the letter. Alternate translation: “May grace, mercy, and peace be with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
-1:3	aseo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative	ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη	1	John is using a declarative statement to express a wish. Alternate translation: “May grace, mercy, and peace be with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-1:3	vpl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός & Υἱοῦ	1	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1:3	w6tr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ	1	The abstract nouns **truth** and **love** describe qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind these abstract nouns with adjectives. Alternative translation: “who are truthful and loving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:4	a3vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν τέκνων σου	1	See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/1.md). This could mean one of three things. (1) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it could mean her biological children. (2) It could mean the spiritual children of the lady. Alternate translation: “the people whom you have led to faith in Jesus” (3) This could be referring to a congregation and the people who are part of it. Alternate translation: “the believers in your group” (For the second and third possibilities, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:4	ir6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σου	1	The word **your** is singular, since John is addressing the “lady.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-1:4	w2b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	John refers figuratively to living one’s life with the expression **walking**. Alternate translation: “living your life according to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:4	s7hr			καθὼς ἐντολὴν ἐλάβομεν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός	1	The expression **received a commandment** expresses the idea that God commanded them to do something. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make **the Father** the subject of a sentence with the verb “command.” Alternate translation: “just as the Father has commanded us”
-1:4	w7f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	**Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1:5	c9xi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σε, & σοι	1	These instances of **you** are singular since John is addressing the “lady.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-1:5	u38f			οὐχ ὡς ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφων σοι	1	John does not refer to himself explicitly as the person writing. If your language requires you to state the subject of a verb, you could add a pronoun here. Alternate translation: “not as though I were writing you a new commandment”
-1:5	uhs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1	The phrase **from the beginning** refers to the time when John and his audience first believed in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “since we first believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:5	vmm8			ἀρχῆς, ἵνα ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could create a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “the beginning. He commanded that we should love one another”
-1:6	nw4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατῶμεν κατὰ & ἐν & περιπατῆτε	1	In these instances the expression **walk** figuratively means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:6	cl95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἠκούσατε & περιπατῆτε	1	The term **you** is plural in this verse and throughout the rest of the epistle, except for in v. 13, since John is addressing both “the lady” and her “children”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-1:7	w25m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [1:10–11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:7	x8yl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί	1	The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: Metonymy)(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:7	wbp6			ὁ ἀντίχριστος	1	The term **antichrist** refers to someone who opposes the true message about Christ and, as a result, is against Jesus himself and his followers. Alternate translation: “the one who is against Christ” or “the one who opposes Christ”
-1:8	it9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλέπετε ἑαυτούς	1	The implication is that the believers are to **watch** themselves, that is, be careful, not to be deceived by the deceivers and antichrists. Alternate translation: “be careful not to let the deceivers and antichrists influence you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:9	mn3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	John refers to **the teaching of Christ** figuratively as a place where faithful believers **remain** and also as a place that false teachers leave as they go **ahead**. The expression **goes ahead** refers to teaching new and false things that Jesus did not teach. Alternate translation: “everyone who teaches things that Jesus did not teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:9	xty9			Θεὸν οὐκ ἔχει	1	To **have God** means to have a relationship with God as Savior through faith in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “does not belong to God” or “does not have a relationship with God”
-1:9	x523			ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, οὗτος καὶ τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱὸν ἔχει	1	Alternate translation: “Someone who follows Christ’s teaching belongs to both the Father and the Son”
-1:9	vg19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	John is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun, to refer to a kind of person. ULT indicates this by adding the word “one.” If your language does not use adjectives this way, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “such a person” or “that kind of person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1:9	k8cv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱὸν	1	These are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1:10	ls1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ λαμβάνετε αὐτὸν εἰς οἰκίαν	1	John does not want the believers to accept a false teacher into their homes and, as a result, show him respect and provide for his needs by feeding and housing him. Alternate translation: “do not support him by welcoming him into your home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:10	lbct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χαίρειν αὐτῷ μὴ λέγετε	1	John warns the believers not to greet a false teacher respectfully in public. The implication is that he does not want them to do anything that might give a false teacher good standing in the eyes of others. Alternate translation: “do not give him a respectful public greeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:11	uhea			ὁ λέγων & αὐτῷ χαίρειν	1	Alternate translation: “the one who gives him a respectful public greeting”
-1:11	n7zt			κοινωνεῖ τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ τοῖς πονηροῖς	1	The verb **shares in** expresses the concept of assisting and helping advance the activity of the false teacher. Alternate translation: “takes part in his evil deeds” or “helps him in his evil deeds”
+1:3	gad9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace** with verbal phrases, with **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus Christ will be kind to us, be merciful to us, and enable us to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:3	zfgr			ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη	1	In this culture, letter writers would normally offer a good wish or blessing for the recipients before introducing the main business of the letter. But instead of a blessing here, John makes a declarative statement. This probably expresses his confidence that God will do as he promised. Be sure that your translation also expresses this confidence.
+1:3	vpl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρός & Υἱοῦ	1	**Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to translate them accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1:3	w6tr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** with adjectives or verbs. There are two possibilities for the meaning of these abstract nouns here. (1) They describe qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternative translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) They describe how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the **grace, mercy, and peace** from God. Alternative translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:4	ir6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σου	1	The word **your** is singular here, since John is addressing the church figuratively as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1:4	ajlf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐχάρην λείαν	1	If it is more natural in your language to state the reason first and then the result, you can put this after **I found some of your children walking in the truth**, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1:4	a3vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῶν τέκνων σου	1	See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/1.md). This could mean one of three things. (1) This refers to the people who are part of a certain congregation. (2) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it could mean either her biological children or (3) her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “the believers from your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:4	w2b6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	John refers figuratively to living one’s life with the expression **walking**. Alternate translation: “living according to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:4	ddnx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	If your language does not use an abstract noun for this, you could use a phrase with an adjective. Alternate translation: “in a way that agrees with the true message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:4	s7hr			καθὼς ἐντολὴν ἐλάβομεν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός	1	The expression **received a commandment** expresses the idea that God commanded the believers to do something. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make **the Father** the subject of a sentence with the verb “command.” Alternate translation: “just as the Father has commanded us”
+1:4	w7f1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός	1	**Father** is an important title for God. Be careful to translate it accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1:5	r4hx			καὶ νῦν	1	These words signal that what follows is the main point of the letter, or at least the first main point. Use a natural way for introducing the main point in your language.
+1:5	c9xi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σε, & σοι	1	These instances of **you** are singular since John is once again addressing the church in a figurative way as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1:5	xjsu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κυρία	1	See how you translated this in [verse 1](../01/01.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:5	u38f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐχ ὡς ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφων σοι	1	John does not refer to himself explicitly as the person writing. If your language requires you to state the subject of a verb, you could add a pronoun here. Alternate translation: “not as though I were writing you a new commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:5	uhs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς	1	The phrase **from the beginning** refers to the time when John and his audience first believed in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “since the time that we first believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:5	vmm8			ἀρχῆς, ἵνα ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “the beginning. He commanded that we should love one another”
+1:6	nw4g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατῶμεν κατὰ & ἐν & περιπατῆτε	1	In these instances the expression **walk** figuratively means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:6	cl95		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ἠκούσατε & περιπατῆτε	1	The term **you** is plural in this verse, because John is addressing a congregation of believers. This is the case throughout the rest of the letter, as well, except in verse 13, because there John returns to his metaphor of referring to a church as a woman and its members as her children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1:7	u749		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	Here, **for** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses - it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1:7	w25m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10–11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:7	x8yl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί	1	The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:7	vqnb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος	1	There are two possibilities for what the word **this** refers to. (1) John is referring to the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” (2) John may be referring to any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you can make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:7	vfdn			ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος	1	In your translation, it may be helpful to clarify that **the deceiver** and **the antichrist** are one person, not two.
+1:8	it9t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βλέπετε ἑαυτούς	1	The implication is that the believers are to **watch** themselves, that is, be careful, so that they are not deceived by the deceivers and antichrists. Alternate translation: “be careful not to let the deceivers and antichrists influence you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:8	i8n6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἃ	1	The word **what** is more fully defined in the next phrase as a **reward**. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say “reward” here, as well. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:8	r9ky		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἰργασάμεθα	1	The word **we** here is inclusive. John, his audience, and others have all worked to build up the faith of the believers to whom John is writing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:9	mn3v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	John refers to **the teaching of Christ** figuratively as a place where faithful believers **remain** and also as a place that false teachers leave as they go **beyond**. The expression **goes beyond** refers to teaching new and false things that Jesus did not teach. Alternate translation: “everyone who teaches things that Jesus did not teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:9	x3ae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure	πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	These two phrases mean the same thing, one stated positively (**goes beyond**) and the other stated negatively (**does not remain**). If it is mote natural in your language, you can reverse the order of these, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+1:9	xty9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	Θεὸν οὐκ ἔχει	1	To **have God** means to have a relationship with God as Savior through faith in Jesus Christ. If it is clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not belong to God” or “does not have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:9	x523			ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, οὗτος καὶ τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱὸν ἔχει	1	“Someone who follows Christ’s teaching belongs to both the Father and the Son”
+1:9	xwoe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ	1	This phrase is in contrast to the previous sentence. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use a word or phrase to mark this contrast, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:9	vg19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	John is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun, to refer to a kind of person. ULT indicates this by adding the word **one**. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “such a person” or “that kind of person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+1:9	k8cv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱὸν	1	These are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to express these titles consistently and accurately. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+1:10	x7pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴ τις ἔρχεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς, καὶ ταύτην τὴν διδαχὴν οὐ φέρει	1	The word **anyone** here implies “any teacher or preacher.” John does not want the believers to welcome any teacher who does not teach what Jesus taught, and specifically that Jesus came as a human being (see [verse 7](../01/07.md)). Alternate translation: “If anyone comes to you, claiming to be a teacher, but he teaches differently than this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:10	xafi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	καὶ ταύτην τὴν διδαχὴν οὐ φέρει	1	John is speaking of a **teaching** or a message as if it were an object that someone could **bring**. If you would not use this kind of metaphor in your language, you can use one that has the same meaning or use plain language. Alternate translation: “does not teach this same message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:10	ls1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ λαμβάνετε αὐτὸν εἰς οἰκίαν	1	John does not want the believers to accept a false teacher into their homes and, as a result, support his false teaching by showing him respect and providing for his needs. Alternate translation: “do not support him or encourage him by welcoming him into your home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:10	lbct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	χαίρειν αὐτῷ μὴ λέγετε	1	John warns the believers not to greet a false teacher respectfully in public. The implication is that he does not want them to do anything that might look like they are endorsing a false teacher or that would give a false teacher good standing in the eyes of others. Alternate translation: “do not give him a respectful public greeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:11	uhea			ὁ λέγων & αὐτῷ χαίρειν	1	“any person who gives him a respectful public greeting”
+1:11	n7zt			κοινωνεῖ τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ τοῖς πονηροῖς	1	The verb **shares in** expresses the concept of assisting and helping to advance the activity of the false teacher. Alternate translation: “takes part in his evil deeds” or “helps him in his evil deeds”
 1:12	gq26		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐβουλήθην διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος	1	Here John leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “I did not want to write these things with paper and ink” (See: Ellipsis)(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1:12	nx77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος	1	John is not saying that he would rather write these things with something other than **paper and ink**. Rather, he is speaking figuratively of those writing materials to represent writing in general. He means that he wants to visit the woman and her children personally and continue his communication with them directly. Alternate translation: “I did not want to communicate these things in writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:12	v4v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	στόμα πρὸς στόμα λαλῆσαι	1	The expression **mouth to mouth** is an idiom, meaning to speak in their presence. Alternate translation: “speak in your presence” or “speak to you in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:12	nx77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος	1	John is not saying that he would rather write these things with something other than **paper and ink**. Rather, he is speaking figuratively of those writing materials to represent writing in general. He means that he wants to visit the believers personally and to continue his communication with them directly. Alternate translation: “to communicate these things in writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:12	v4v2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	στόμα πρὸς στόμα λαλῆσαι	1	The expression **mouth to mouth** is an idiom, meaning to speak in their presence. Use an idiom in your language with this same meaning, or simply express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak face to face” or “to speak to you in person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1:12	auwq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active verb form. Alternate translation: “so that this will make your joy complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:12	hwtk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “so that this will make you completely joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:12	lt77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants	ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ	1	See the note in Part 3 of the General Introduction to 2 John about the textual issue here. Alternate translation: “our joy might be made complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1:13	a4rc			ἀσπάζεταί σε τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς	1	As was customary in this culture, John concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people he is writing to. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation.
-1:13	fh6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου	1	This expression could mean one of several things. (1) It may refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. Alternate translation: “Your nieces and nephews” (2) It may refer to the spiritual children of the biological sister of a woman to whom John is writing. Alternate translation: “The people whom your sister has led to faith in Jesus” (3) It may refer to the biological children of a spiritual sister of a woman to whom John is writing. Alternate translation: “The children of your sister in Christ” (4) It may refer to the spiritual children of a spiritual sister of a woman to whom John is writing. Alternate translation: “The people whom your sister in Christ has led to faith in Jesus” (5) If the term “lady” is figurative for a group of believers in [1:1](../01/01.md), then John may be figuratively describing his own group of believers as the sister of that group and the members of his group as her children. Alternate translation: “the members of the group of believers here” (For the second through fifth possibilities, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:13	aonw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς	1	In this context, the term **chosen** likely indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “your Christian sister” or “this group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:13	qjdz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σε & σου	1	The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular. John tells the lady specifically that her sister’s children send greetings to her in particular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1:12	k9yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὑμῶν	1	If you use “our” here instead of **your**, it would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:13	fh6j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς	1	This expression could mean one of several things. (1) This is a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is figuratively describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “the members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) This could refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John could be using the words **sister** and **children** figuratively in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:13	aonw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς	1	In this context, the term **chosen** indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. In the context of John’s metaphor, this indicates a church or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “the members of this group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:13	a4rc			ἀσπάζεταί σε	1	As was customary in this culture, John concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
+1:13	qjdz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	σε & σου	1	The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular here, in keeping with John’s metaphor of writing to a congregation as though it were a lady. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

tn_2PE.tsv

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ front:intro	mvk9				0	# Introduction to 2 Peter\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:2	vq19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	You can translate “knowledge” using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “through your knowing God and Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:3	ywj9				0	Peter begins to teach the believers about living godly lives.
 1:3	epx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν	1	Here “godliness” describes the word “life.” Alternate translation: “for a godly life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
-1:3	an3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ καλέσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	Here the word “us” refers to Peter and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	an3z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ καλέσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	Here the word “us” refers to Peter and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:4	m91m			δι’ ὧν	1	Here “these” refers to “his own glory and virtue.”
 1:4	f42f			γένησθε & κοινωνοὶ	1	“you might share”
 1:4	yk7g			θείας & φύσεως	1	what God is like
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ front:intro	mvk9				0	# Introduction to 2 Peter\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:16	vc99		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὐ γὰρ σεσοφισμένοις μύθοις ἐξακολουθήσαντες	1	Here the word “we” refers to Peter and the other apostles, but not to his readers. Alternate translation: “For we apostles did not follow cleverly made-up stories” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:16	jwy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τὴν & δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν	1	These two phrases may refer to the same thing and be translated as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the powerful coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 1:16	zs6v			τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ & παρουσίαν	1	Possible meanings are (1) the future second coming of the Lord Jesus or (2) the first coming of the Lord Jesus.
-1:16	v4kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the word “our” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:16	v4kd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here the word “our” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:17	m33h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ & ὑπὸ τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when he heard a voice come from the Majestic Glory” or “when he heard the voice of the Majestic Glory speak to him” or “when the Majestic Glory spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:17	yd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης	1	Peter refers to God in terms of his glory. This is a euphemism that avoids using God’s name, out of reverence for him. Alternate translation: “God, the Supreme Glory, saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 1:18	ezn2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ταύτην τὴν φωνὴν ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν	1	With the word “We,” Peter is referring to himself and to the disciples James and John, who heard the voice of God. Alternate translation: “We ourselves heard this voice that came from heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ front:intro	mvk9				0	# Introduction to 2 Peter\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:18	mlm9			σὺν αὐτῷ, ὄντες	1	“we were with Jesus”
 1:19	km3l				0	Peter begins to warn the believers about false teachers.
 1:19	h498		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἔχομεν βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον	1	The things that Peter and the other apostles saw, which he described in the previous verses, confirm what the prophets spoke. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For the things that we saw make this prophetic message more sure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:19	z3na		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	καὶ ἔχομεν	1	Here the word “we” refers to all believers, including Peter and his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:19	z3na		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ ἔχομεν	1	Here the word “we” refers to all believers, including Peter and his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:19	l7zq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον	1	This refers to the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the scriptures, which the prophets spoke, made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1:19	sjd3			ᾧ καλῶς ποιεῖτε προσέχοντες	1	Peter instructs the believers to pay close attention to the prophetic message.
 1:19	xt8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς λύχνῳ φαίνοντι ἐν αὐχμηρῷ τόπῳ, ἕως οὗ ἡμέρα διαυγάσῃ	1	Peter compares the prophetic word to a lamp that gives light in the dark until light comes in the morning. The coming of morning is a reference to Christ’s coming. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

tn_2TH.tsv

@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ front:intro	krd6				0	# Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 2:15	z2vs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἴτε διὰ λόγου, εἴτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν	1	“By word” here is a synecdoche for “by instructions” or “by teachings.” You can make clear the implicit information. Alternate translation: “whether by what we taught you in person or by what we wrote to you in a letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 2:16	njk1				0	Paul ends with a blessing from God.
 2:16	g8m1			δὲ	1	Paul uses this word here to mark a change in topic.
-2:16	yge9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν & ὁ ἀγαπήσας ἡμᾶς καὶ δοὺς	1	The words “our” and “us” refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:16	yge9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν & ὁ ἀγαπήσας ἡμᾶς καὶ δοὺς	1	The words “our” and “us” refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:16	cm54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος & Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς	1	Here “himself” gives additional emphasis to the phrase “Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 2:17	x3rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι ἐν	1	Here “hearts” represents the seat of emotions. Alternate translation: “comfort you and strengthen you for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2:17	yw5f			παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ	1	“every good thing you do and say”
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ front:intro	krd6				0	# Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n## Part 1: General Intr
 3:6	v33v			δὲ	1	Paul uses this word to mark a change in topic.
 3:6	x9l8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Here “brothers” means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 3:6	y4a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	“Name” here is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-3:6	jvw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Here “our” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:6	jvw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Here “our” refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:7	h222			μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	“to act the way that my fellow workers and I act”
 3:7	b1i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “We lived among you as those who had much discipline” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 3:8	d9h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι	1	“we worked during the night and during the day.” Here “night” and “day” are a merism and they mean “all the time.” Alternate translation: “we worked all the time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])

tn_2TI.tsv

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
-front:intro	s7fk				0	# Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy\n\n1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).\n2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).\n3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).\n4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).\n\n### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nThis book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?\n\nPaul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?\n\nAs Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.\n\n### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?\n\nGod is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n\n### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”\n\n\nIn this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nFor the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.\n\n* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”\n* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+front:intro	s7fk				0	# Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy\n\n1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).\n2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).\n3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).\n4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).\n\n### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nThis book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?\n\nPaul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?\n\nAs Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.\n\n### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?\n\nGod is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”\n\nIn this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nFor the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.\n\n* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”\n* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1:intro	p5lf				0	# 2 Timothy 01 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual children\n\nPaul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Persecution\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
 1:1	p001		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Παῦλος	1	This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1:1	ha4l			Παῦλος	1	This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ front:intro	s7fk				0	# Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:2	w43q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing	χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ	1	After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
 1:2	p003		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη	1	Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes these three abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:2	ub7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς	1	This is an important title for God. Paul could be referring to God here as (1) the Father of Christ, or (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1:2	dcr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:2	dcr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	p004		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternative translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:3	tvb7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων	1	This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 1:3	ha9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει	1	Paul speaks of his conscience as if it could be physically clean. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ front:intro	s7fk				0	# Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:6	i977		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου	1	Paul placed his **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would give him power from God’s Spirit to enable him to do the work that God had called him to do. Then Timothy received the gift from the Holy Spirit. See how you translated this in 1 Tim 4:14. Alternative translation: “the gift of God that you received when I prayed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 1:6	p010		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου	1	Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternative translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:6	s6vb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου	1	It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:7	u8vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be clearer in your language, you can replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that…” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1:7	u8vl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Here, **for** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be clearer in your language, you can replace **for** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that…” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1:7	h1z3			οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ	1	This could mean one of two things. (1) **spirit** could refer to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) **spirit** could refer to the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
 1:7	p011		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ	1	Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:7	k6g7			σωφρονισμοῦ	1	The word **discipline** could mean one of two things. (1) **discipline** could refer to self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) **discipline** could refer to the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ front:intro	s7fk				0	# Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:18	f3ep		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1:18	p024		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἐφέσῳ	1	This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1:18	p025		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις	1	Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, in Ephesus. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2:intro	k3zn				0	# 2 Timothy 02 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### We will reign with him\nFaithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Analogies\nIn this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
+2:intro	k3zn				0	# 2 Timothy 02 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### We will reign with him\nFaithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Analogies\nIn this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
 2:1	bll5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τέκνον μου	1	Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:1	p026		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐνδυναμοῦ	1	You could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2:1	e6ex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ front:intro	s7fk				0	# Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 3:15	w9l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι	1	Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become wise. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 3:15	p098		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς σωτηρίαν διὰ πίστεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “so that you will know enough to trust Christ Jesus to save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 3:16	s274		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος καὶ	1	The term **God-breathed** uses the image of breathing to indicate that the Scriptures come directly from God through his Spirit. Characteristically in the Bible, the breath of God represents the Spirit of God. Alternate translation: “God produced all Scripture as his Spirit directed people what to write, and it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-3:16	hvr1			πᾶσα Γραφὴ	1	By **All Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you can change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate Translation: “All of the Holy Writings are”
+3:16	hvr1			πᾶσα Γραφὴ	1	By **all Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you can change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate Translation: “All of the Holy Writings are”
 3:16	uv35			ὠφέλιμος	1	Paul refers to the Scripture as **profitable** to convey the idea that Timothy and all believers will benefit when they use the Scripture to teach, reprove, correct, and train. Alternate translation: “you will benefit from it as you use it” or “it benefits everyone when we use it”
 3:16	vl2n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἐλεγμόν	1	Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for knowing what is right and wrong and showing people that they are wrong. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reproof** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people that they are wrong” or “for helping us to know when we are wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 3:16	e5h9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν	1	Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for showing people how to make something right. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **correction** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people how to make things right” or “for showing us how to fix errors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

tn_3JN.tsv

@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ front:intro	kwv9				0	# Introduction to 3 John\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 1:11	zan2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὐχ ἑώρακεν τὸν Θεόν	1	“Seeing” here is a metaphor that stands for knowing or understanding. Alternate translation: “has not experienced God” or “has not believed in God” Also see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:12	pl7i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	Δημητρίῳ μεμαρτύρηται ὑπὸ πάντων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “all who know Demetrius bear witness of him” or “every believer who knows Demetrius speaks well of him” See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:12	m22h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Δημητρίῳ	1	This is probably a man whom John wants Gaius and the congregation to welcome when he comes to visit. He may be the person delivering this letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:12	rad4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας	1	“the truth itself speaks well of him” Here, **truth** is described as though it were a person speaking. **Truth** here refers to “the true message from God.” Alternate translation: “everyone who knows the truth knows that he is a good person” Also see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:12	rad4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας	1	“the truth itself speaks well of him” Here, **truth** is described as though it were a person speaking. Here **truth** refers to “the true message from God.” Alternate translation: “everyone who knows the truth knows that he is a good person” Also see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 1:12	mftm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας	1	There are words left out of this clause but they are understood from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he is borne witness to by the truth itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1:12	s712		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καὶ ἡμεῖς δὲ μαρτυροῦμεν	1	What John is confirming is implied and can be made explicit here. Alternate translation: “and we also speak well of Demetrius” Also see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1:12	a16a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	Here, **we** refers to John and those with him and does not include Gaius. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

tn_ACT.tsv

@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 4:10	j3px			πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	“to you who are questioning us and to all the other people of Israel”
 4:10	khn7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	Here the word “name” refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “by the power of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 4:10	jyj6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-4:11	tdw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Peter as well as those to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:11	tdw8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Peter as well as those to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:11	nwg6				0	Peter completes his speech to the Jewish religious rulers that he began in [Acts 4:8](../04/08.md).
 4:11	w195		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ λίθος & ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	Peter is quoting from the Psalms. This is a metaphor that means the religious leaders, like builders, rejected Jesus, but God will made him the most important in his kingdom, as a cornerstone in a building is important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:11	f1nx			κεφαλὴν	1	Here the word “head” means “most important” or “vital.”
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 5:31	q1il		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	The word “Israel” refers to the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 5:32	yml6			τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	“those who submit to God’s authority”
 5:33	ekh2				0	Gamaliel addresses the council members.
-5:33	abc6			ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	“kill the apostles”
+5:33	abx6			ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	“kill the apostles”
 5:34	i2rr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	Γαμαλιήλ, νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	Luke introduces Gamaliel and provides background information about him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 5:34	fpr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 5:34	xk6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 7:15	fe56			αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	“Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors”
 7:16	slg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ μετετέθησαν & καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants carried Jacob’s body and his son’s bodies over…and buried them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 7:16	la8a			τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	“with money”
-7:17	np3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “our” includes Stephen and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+7:17	np3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “our” includes Stephen and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 7:17	tuq2				1	In some languages it may be helpful to say that the people increased in number before saying that the time of the promise arrived.
 7:17	tlh9			ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	It was close to the time that God would fulfill his promise to Abraham.
 7:18	whe7			ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος	1	“another king began to rule”
@@ -1015,12 +1015,12 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 11:12	w6ia			εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	This refers to the house of Cornelius.
 11:13	few6			Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	“Simon who is also called Peter.” See how you translated the same phrase in [Acts 10:32](../10/32.md).
 11:14	hpr2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-11:15	qy12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “us” refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+11:15	qy12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “us” refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 11:15	a8jw			ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.
 11:15	ak2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 11:15	th4m			ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.
 11:16	v116		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-11:17	pe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “them” refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word “they” refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. The word “us” includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+11:17	pe42		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “them” refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word “they” refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. The word “us” includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 11:17	e576				0	Peter finishes his speech (which he began in [Acts 11:4](../11/04.md)) to the Jews about his vision and about what had happened at the house of Cornelius.
 11:17	u3nu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν	1	Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them…I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 11:17	y7ag			τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν	1	Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit.
@@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 13:15	td4h			ἀδελφοί	1	The term “brothers” is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.
 13:15	jru8			εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως	1	“if you want to say anything to encourage us”
 13:15	kj1h			λέγετε	1	“please speak it” or “please tell it to us”
-13:16	tbc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The first word “he” refers to Paul. The second word “he” refers to God. Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. The words “they” and “them” refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+13:16	tbc4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The first word “he” refers to Paul. The second word “he” refers to God. Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. The words “they” and “them” refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 13:16	p93q				0	Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history.
 13:16	i8pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ	1	This could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moved his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 13:16	rh93			οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God”
@@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 13:17	vw4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ	1	This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 13:17	b74t			ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	“out from the land of Egypt”
 13:18	zv9e			ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς	1	This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them”
-13:19	nvp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “he” refers to God. The words “their land” refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. The word “them” refers to the people of Israel. The word “our” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+13:19	nvp7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “he” refers to God. The words “their land” refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. The word “them” refers to the people of Israel. The word “our” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 13:19	h5qg			ἔθνη	1	Here the word “nations” refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries.
 13:20	m4jd			ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα	1	“took more than 450 years to accomplish”
 13:20	abcm			ἔδωκεν	1	“God gave them”
@@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 13:25	nnl5			ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ	1	This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.
 13:25	r1pl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ	1	This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 13:25	gys2			οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	“I am not worthy even to untie his shoes.” The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him.
-13:26	jdp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+13:26	jdp6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 13:26	kci9			ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God.
 13:26	u6zn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 13:26	v6r3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	The word “salvation” can be translated with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1429,12 +1429,12 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 14:20	pan3			τῶν μαθητῶν	1	These were new believers in the city of Lystra.
 14:20	aqx3			εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	“Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers”
 14:20	e2y9			ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην	1	“Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe”
-14:21	wv7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+14:21	wv7e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 14:21	ykt4			τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην	1	“Derbe” ([Acts 14:20](../14/20.md))
 14:22	ek9l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	Here “souls” refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 14:22	zkd2			παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	“encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus”
-14:22	d9ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Some version translate this as an indirect quote, “saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” The word “we” here includes Luke and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
-14:22	wu1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	Paul includes his hearers, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+14:22	d9ic		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Some version translate this as an indirect quote, “saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” The word “we” here includes Luke and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+14:22	wu1c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	Paul includes his hearers, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 14:23	pk5l				0	Except for the third use of the word “they” which refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord, all the words “they” here refer to Paul and Barnabas.
 14:23	mqp9			χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους	1	“When Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers”
 14:23	nd87			παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς	1	Possible meanings are (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers”
@@ -1470,7 +1470,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 15:5	k6k7			δέ τινες	1	Here Luke contrasts those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.
 15:5	b9nt			τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως	1	“to obey the law of Moses”
 15:6	ugu6			ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1	The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.
-15:7	wct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The first word “them” refers to apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) and the other words “them” and “their” refer to the believing Gentiles. Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the apostles and elders present. The word “he” refers to God. Here “us” is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+15:7	wct8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The first word “them” refers to apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) and the other words “them” and “their” refer to the believing Gentiles. Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the apostles and elders present. The word “he” refers to God. Here “us” is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 15:7	hxu9				0	Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law ([Acts 15:5-6](./05.md)).
 15:7	a6q9			ἀδελφοί	1	Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present.
 15:7	s3wb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	Here “mouth” refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -1482,7 +1482,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 15:8	abcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν	1	Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words ‘he gave’ that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 15:9	zs2g			οὐδὲν διέκρινεν	1	God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers.
 15:9	ase1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Here “heart” stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-15:10	ha45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Peter includes his audience by his use of “our” and “we.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+15:10	ha45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Peter includes his audience by his use of “our” and “we.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 15:10	wjq7				0	Peter finishes speaking to the apostles and elders.
 15:10	rfr4			νῦν	1	This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
 15:10	zaz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι	1	Peter uses a question with a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “Do not test God by putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1510,7 +1510,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 15:17	tu21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 15:17	c8gm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	Here “my name” stands for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 15:18	tr27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	γνωστὰ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-15:19	g3zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “we” includes James, the apostles, and the elders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+15:19	g3zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” includes James, the apostles, and the elders. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 15:19	f6za				0	James finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. (See: [Acts 15:2](../15/02.md) and [Acts 15:13](./13.md))
 15:19	pyb9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles to become circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 15:19	vr6u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically turning towards God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1629,7 +1629,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 16:19	hf82			ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας	1	“into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”
 16:20	d2rg			καὶ προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	“When they had brought them to the judges”
 16:20	wa94			στρατηγοῖς	1	rulers, judges
-16:20	dkz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here the word “our” refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+16:20	dkz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	Here the word “our” refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 16:21	gna6			παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	“to believe or to obey” or “to accept or to do”
 16:22	r1gr				0	Here the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. The word “they” here refers to soldiers.
 16:22	at6i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1771,12 +1771,12 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 17:25	e3dg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται	1	Here “served” has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men’s hands take care of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 17:25	yq68		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων	1	Here “hands” stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 17:25	sj89		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς διδοὺς	1	“because he himself.” The word “himself” is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-17:26	r3lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to the one true God, the creator. The words “their” and “them” refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. In using the word “us,” Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+17:26	r3lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to the one true God, the creator. The words “their” and “them” refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. In using the word “us,” Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 17:26	p1e4			ἑνὸς	1	This means Adam, the first person God created. This can be stated to include Eve. It was through Adam and Eve that God made all other people. Alternate translation: “one couple”
 17:26	js4p			ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν	1	This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”
 17:27	jae5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	Here “search for God” represents desiring to know him, and “feel their way toward him and find him” represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 17:27	p8hk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-17:28	tkd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the words “him” and “his” refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says “we” here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+17:28	tkd3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the words “him” and “his” refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says “we” here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 17:28	cbd9			ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ	1	“Because of him”
 17:29	k9ws		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 17:29	czi9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ θεῖον	1	Here “deity” refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “that God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2037,7 +2037,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 20:11	w5w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον	1	Bread was a common food during meals. Here “break bread” probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 20:11	t88c			οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν	1	“he went away”
 20:12	jkj5			τὸν παῖδα	1	This refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). Possible meanings are (1) he was a young man over 14 years old or (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or (3) the word “boy” implies that he was a servant or a slave.
-20:12	abc0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+20:12	abx0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 20:13	dja7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “he,” “himself,” and “him” refer to Paul. Here the word “we” refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 20:13	awt9				0	The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip.
 20:13	w4ew		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς & προελθόντες	1	The word “ourselves” adds emphasis and separates Luke and his traveling companions from Paul, who did not travel by boat. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -2053,7 +2053,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 20:15	s7g2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Μίλητον	1	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 20:16	p272		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 20:16	p61e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι	1	This speaks about “time” as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-20:17	nw52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The word “our” refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+20:17	nw52		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The word “our” refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 20:17	v9al				0	Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
 20:17	l9aj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	τῆς Μιλήτου	1	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15](../20/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 20:18	b6li		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς	1	Here “yourselves” is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -2392,7 +2392,7 @@ front:intro	mw28				0	# Introduction to Acts\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 23:31	ny4k			οἱ & οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	The word “so” marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the chief captain’s commanding the soldiers to escort Paul.
 23:31	ptv4			ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς	1	Here “brought” can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “They got Paul and took him at night”
 23:32	abd1			ἐάσαντες & ὑπέστρεψαν	1	Here both instances of **they** refer to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.
-23:33	abc1			εἰσελθόντες	1	Here **they** refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
+23:33	abx1			εἰσελθόντες	1	Here **they** refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
 23:34	u44w				0	Here the first and second words “he” refer to Governor Felix, the third word “he” and the word “him” refer to Paul, and the last word “he” refers to Governor Felix. The words “you” and your” refer to Paul.
 23:34	abd2			ἀναγνοὺς & ἐπερωτήσας & πυθόμενος	1	All of these actions are things the governor did.
 23:34	dtx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])

tn_DEU.tsv

@@ -1727,11 +1727,11 @@ front:intro	rm3n				0	# Introduction to Deuteronomy\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 26:5	bu5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet		0	These words mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that Israel became a large and powerful nation. Alternate translation: “very great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 26:6	i527				0	This continues what the Israelite must say when he brings his first crops to Yahweh.
 26:6	ujn6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet		0	These two phrases say basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Egyptians acted very harshly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-26:6	c31y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to the people of Israel that were living in Egypt. The speaker includes himself as one of the people whether he lived in Egypt or not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+26:6	c31y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to the people of Israel that were living in Egypt. The speaker includes himself as one of the people whether he lived in Egypt or not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 26:7	yr33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	Here “voice” refers to the whole person and his cries or prayers. Alternate translation: “he heard our cries” or “he heard our prayers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 26:7	g82f				0	“that the Egyptians were afflicting us, that we were doing very hard work, and that the Egyptians were oppressing us”
 26:8	c2ae				0	This continues what the Israelite must say when he brings his first crops to Yahweh.
-26:8	bl9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to the people of Israel that were living in Egypt. The speaker includes himself as one of the people whether he lived in Egypt or not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+26:8	bl9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to the people of Israel that were living in Egypt. The speaker includes himself as one of the people whether he lived in Egypt or not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 26:8	qdu1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Here “a mighty hand” and “an outstretched arm” are metaphors for Yahweh’s power. See how you translated these words in [Deuteronomy 4:34](../04/34.md). Alternate translation: “by showing his mighty power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 26:8	r6wp				0	“with acts that terrified the people who saw them”
 26:9	e5yf				0	This is an idiom. See how you translated this in [Deuteronomy 6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “a land where plenty of milk and honey flow” or “a land that is excellent for cattle and farming”
@@ -1974,7 +1974,7 @@ front:intro	rm3n				0	# Introduction to Deuteronomy\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 29:5	g59z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Moses speaks to the Israelites as if they were one man, so the word “your” here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 29:6	cv6m				0	Alcoholic drinks made probably from fermented grains. They were not distilled liquors.
 29:7	d31m				0	See how you translated these names in [Deuteronomy 1:4](../01/04.md).
-29:7	i2yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+29:7	i2yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 29:9	ze3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	These two phrases mean the same thing and emphasize that the people were to obey Yahweh’s commands. Alternate translation: “obey all the words of this covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 29:10	it8r				0	Moses continues speaking to the people of Israel.
 29:11	b36y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Moses speaks to the Israelites as if they were one man, so the words “you” and “your” here are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

tn_EPH.tsv

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:1	ilf2			Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ & τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ	1	Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle … write this letter to you, God’s holy people in Ephesus”
 1:1	u73p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him, picturing believers as being surrounded by Christ. Alternate Translation: “in close relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:2	x9ey			χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη	1	This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing.
-1:3	lm67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	In this book, unless otherwise stated, the words “us” and “we” refer to Paul, the believers in Ephesus, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	lm67		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	In this book, unless otherwise stated, the words “us” and “we” refer to Paul, the believers in Ephesus, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	zdh3				0	Paul opens his letter by talking about the believers’ position and their safety before God.
 1:3	g6sj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	This can be stated in an active form. Alternate translation: “let us praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:3	cr9h			ὁ εὐλογήσας ἡμᾶς	1	“for God has blessed us”
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:4	ibv6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ἁγίους καὶ ἀμώμους	1	Paul uses these two similar words to emphasize moral goodness. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1:4	ab01		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀμώμους	1	The word **blameless** contains two negative ideas: “blame” or “fault,” and “-less,” which means “without.” If it is clearer in your language, the two negative ideas can be replaced with the corresponding positive idea, “perfect.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1:5	fp7l				0	The words “his,” “He,” and “he” refer to God.
-1:5	h7pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	προορίσας ἡμᾶς εἰς υἱοθεσίαν	1	The word **us** refers to Paul, the Ephesian church, and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “God planned long ago to adopt us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:5	h7pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	προορίσας ἡμᾶς εἰς υἱοθεσίαν	1	The word **us** refers to Paul, the Ephesian church, and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “God planned long ago to adopt us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:5	pq1x			προορίσας ἡμᾶς	1	“God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago”
 1:5	e6f6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς υἱοθεσίαν	1	Here, **adoption** is a metaphor that refers to becoming part of God’s family. Alternate translation: “to become his children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:5	ciu3			διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	God brought believers into his family by the work of Jesus Christ.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:10	n2sl			εἰς οἰκονομίαν	1	A new sentence can be started here. Alternate translation: “He did this with a view to an administration” or “He did this, thinking about a stewardship”
 1:10	em7q			τοῦ πληρώματος τῶν καιρῶν	1	“when the time is right” or “at the time that he has appointed”
 1:10	ab7q			ἐν αὐτῷ	1	“under his rule” or “under his authority”
-1:11	ww9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐκληρώθημεν, προορισθέντες	1	The pronouns **we** and **We** are inclusive in this verse. Paul is referring to all Christians, who were predestined to belong to Christ. In verses 12 and 13 he will divide this group into “we” (exclusive) Jewish Christians and “you” Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:11	ww9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐκληρώθημεν, προορισθέντες	1	Both pronouns **we** are inclusive in this verse. Paul is referring to all Christians, who were predestined to belong to Christ. In verses 12 and 13 he will divide this group into “we” (exclusive) Jewish Christians and “you” Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:11	t281		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐκληρώθημεν	1	This can be stated in active form. Possible meanings are: (1) “God also chose us to be his possession” or (2) “God also chose us to be heirs.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:11	nkf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	προορισθέντες	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:12	gj44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & τοὺς προηλπικότας ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1	Here, the word **we** is exclusive and refers to the Jewish believers who first heard the good news, not the believers at Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 1:13	abcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐσφραγίσθητε	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sealed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:14	g6dw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρραβὼν τῆς κληρονομίας ἡμῶν	1	Receiving what God has promised is spoken of in terms of one inheriting property or wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “an initial portion that we will receive from what God has promised” or “a guarantee that we will receive what God has promised to give us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:15	d9qy				0	Paul prays for the Ephesian believers and praises God for the power that believers have through Christ.
-1:15	abcc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the Ephesians had believed the gospel and had been sealed by the Holy Spirit. The result is that Paul praises God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1:15	abcc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The connecting phrase **for this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the Ephesians had believed the gospel and had been sealed by the Holy Spirit. The result is that Paul praises God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1:16	scy9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	οὐ παύομαι εὐχαριστῶν	1	Paul uses **not stopped** to emphasize that he continues to thank God. Alternate translation: “I continue to thank God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 1:16	aby9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	οὐ παύομαι εὐχαριστῶν	1	Paul uses this exaggeration to emphasize that he thanks God very often. Alternate translation: “I continue to thank God” or “I often thank God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 1:17	abcd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Paul prays for the Ephesians. The result is that God would enlighten the Ephesians about all that he has done for them through Christ. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 2:2	ab9y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας	1	“people who routinely disobey God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2:3	d3wd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκὸς καὶ τῶν διανοιῶν	1	The words **body** and **mind** represent the entire person. Alternate Translation: “the selfish things that people want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2:3	zd6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τέκνα & ὀργῆς	1	“people with whom God is angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-2:4	abco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The love and mercy of God is in sharp contrast to the evil way the Ephesians lived before they believed in God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:4	abco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. The love and mercy of God is in sharp contrast to the evil way the Ephesians lived before they believed in God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 2:4	chm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	Θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει	1	**Mercy** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “God is abundantly merciful” or “God is very kind to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2:4	hrx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ, ἣν ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς	1	**Love** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “because he loved us so very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2:5	h6km		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι	1	This can be stated in an active form. Alternate translation: “God saved you by being gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -98,32 +98,32 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 2:6	m6pq			ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	**In Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
 2:7	abcp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of God raising up believers and seating them in heaven with Christ is to show the extent of his grace in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2:7	y6cf			ἐν τοῖς αἰῶσιν, τοῖς ἐπερχομένοις	1	“in the future”
-2:8	abcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the Ephesians had been saved by God, and not by their own good works. The result is that people would see the grace of God to us in Christ. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:8	abcq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	The connecting word **for** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the Ephesians had been saved by God, and not by their own good works. The result is that people would see the grace of God to us in Christ. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:8	t9pc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῇ γὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι διὰ πίστεως	1	This can be stated actively. Alternate translation: “God saved you by grace because of your faith in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2:8	abpc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῇ γὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι	1	**Grace** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “God saved you as a free gift” or “God saved you because of his extreme kindness to you” See how you translated this phrase in [Ephesians 2:5](../02/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 2:8	r8u8			τοῦτο	1	The word **this** refers back to **by grace you have been saved by faith**.
 2:9	al4s			οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων, ἵνα μή τις καυχήσηται	1	You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “salvation does not come from works, so that no one may boast” or “God does not save a person because of what that person does, so no one can boast and say that he earned his salvation”
 2:9	abcr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of God for saving believers by grace instead of by their works is that no person might boast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-2:10	abcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God is the one who created us to do any good works that we do. The result is that people cannot boast. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:10	abcs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	The connecting word **for** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God is the one who created us to do any good works that we do. The result is that people cannot boast. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:10	fa4l			ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	**In Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
 2:10	abd0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of God creating us as he did is that we would do the good works that he intended for us to do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 2:10	lws4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτοῖς περιπατήσωμεν	1	Walking on a path is a metaphor for how a person lives his life. Here, **in them** refers to the **good works**. Alternate translation: “we would always and continually do those good deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2:11	abct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that they were saved by God and not by anything they had done on their own. The result is that the Ephesians would remember that they were once separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:11	abct		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that they were saved by God and not by anything they had done on their own. The result is that the Ephesians would remember that they were once separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:11	diq1				0	Paul reminds these believers that God has now made Gentiles and Jews into one body through Christ and his cross.
 2:11	p7m2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί	1	This refers to people who were not born Jewish. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:11	e76g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἀκροβυστία	1	Non-Jewish people were not circumcised as babies and thus the Jews considered them people who do not follow any of God’s laws. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised pagans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2:11	nlf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	περιτομῆς	1	This was another term for Jewish people because all male infants were circumcised. Alternate translation: “circumcised people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2:11	tf9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ τῆς λεγομένης	1	This can be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “by what people call” or “by those whom people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2:11	fb4r			τῆς λεγομένης περιτομῆς ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου	1	Possible meanings are (1) “Jews, who are circumcised by humans” or (2) “Jews, who circumcise the physical body.”
-2:12	abcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that they were not part of the Jews, who were circumcised. The result is that the Gentile Ephesians were separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:12	abcz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **for** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that they were not part of the Jews, who were circumcised. The result is that the Gentile Ephesians were separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:12	u3vu			χωρὶς Χριστοῦ	1	“unbelievers”
 2:12	sti2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ξένοι τῶν διαθηκῶν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	Paul speaks to the Gentile believers as if they had been foreigners, kept out of the land of God’s covenant and promise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2:13	abcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The current condition of the Ephesian Gentile believers, after they believed in Christ, is that they are near to God. That is in contrast to their previous condition, before they believed in Christ, of being separated from God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:13	abcw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. The current condition of the Ephesian Gentile believers, after they believed in Christ, is that they are near to God. That is in contrast to their previous condition, before they believed in Christ, of being separated from God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 2:13	uf8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς οἵ ποτε ὄντες μακρὰν, ἐγενήθητε ἐγγὺς ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Not belonging to God due to sin is spoken of as being far away from God. Belonging to God because of the blood of Christ is spoken of as being brought near to God. Alternate translation: “you who once did not belong to God now belong to God because of the blood of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:13	tth1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The blood of Christ is a metonym for his death. Alternate translation: “by Christ’s death” or “when Christ died for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-2:14	abcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ himself joined them to the Jewish believers. The result is that the Ephesian Gentile believers were brought near to God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:14	abcv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	The connecting word **for** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ himself joined them to the Jewish believers. The result is that the Ephesian Gentile believers were brought near to God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:14	ue4u			αὐτὸς & ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν	1	“Jesus gives us his peace”
-2:14	ccy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν	1	The word **our** refers to Paul and his readers and so, it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:14	ccy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡ εἰρήνη ἡμῶν	1	The word **our** refers to Paul and his readers and so, it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:14	t9zn			ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἓν	1	“who made the Jews and Gentiles one”
 2:14	t6rd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ αὐτοῦ	1	The words **his flesh,** his physical body, are a metonym for his body dying. Alternate translation: “by the death of his body on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 2:14	d7uf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ μεσότοιχον τοῦ φραγμοῦ & τὴν ἔχθραν	1	The hostility between the Jews and Gentiles is compared to a wall. Alternate translation: “the hostility that was like a wall that separated them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -139,12 +139,12 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 2:17	g1hz			εὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην	1	“announced the gospel of peace” or “declared the gospel of peace”
 2:17	wdu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν τοῖς μακρὰν	1	Paul pictures the Gentiles (non-Jews), who were not part of God’s people, as though they were physically distant from God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:17	a58n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἐγγύς	1	Paul pictures the Jews, who were God’s people by birth, as though they were physically close to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2:18	qw56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ὅτι δι’ αὐτοῦ ἔχομεν τὴν προσαγωγὴν, οἱ ἀμφότεροι	1	Here, **we both** refers to Paul, the believing Jews, and the believing non-Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:18	qw56		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὅτι δι’ αὐτοῦ ἔχομεν τὴν προσαγωγὴν, οἱ ἀμφότεροι	1	Here, **we both** refers to Paul, the believing Jews, and the believing non-Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:18	abcu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **for** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that he himself is the one who enabled both Jew and Gentile to come to the Father. The result is that Christ proclaimed peace to both the Jews and the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:18	kt1m			ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι	1	All believers, both Jewish and Gentile, are enabled to enter into the presence of God the Father by the same Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the same Spirit”
-2:19	abcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα οὖν	1	The connecting phrase **So then** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ gave them access to God through the Spirit. The result is that the Ephesian believers are no longer separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+2:19	abcy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα οὖν	1	The connecting phrase **so then** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ gave them access to God through the Spirit. The result is that the Ephesian believers are no longer separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 2:19	abd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι	1	The words **strangers** and **foreigners** have very similar meanings and may be combined. Alternate translation: “people who had no relationship to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-2:19	abd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. The previous separation of the Ephesians from God is in contrast to their current status as citizens of the kingdom of God and members of his household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+2:19	abd2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **instead** introduces a contrast relationship. The previous separation of the Ephesians from God is in contrast to their current status as citizens of the kingdom of God and members of his household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 2:19	r11r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ συνπολῖται τῶν ἁγίων καὶ οἰκεῖοι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul is again speaking of the spiritual condition of Gentiles after they become believers as he would speak about foreigners becoming citizens of a different nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:20	r2je		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐποικοδομηθέντες ἐπὶ τῷ θεμελίῳ	1	Paul speaks of God’s people as if they were a building. Christ is the cornerstone, the apostles are the foundation, and the believers are the structure. Alternate translation: “you depend on the teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:20	fs7j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐποικοδομηθέντες	1	This can be stated in the active tense. Alternate translation: “God has built you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 2:22	e52h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε	1	This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “God is also building you together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:intro	gha7				0	# Ephesians 03 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\n### “I pray”\n\nPaul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Mystery\nPaul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God.
 3:1	w896				0	To make clear the hidden truth about the church to believers, Paul refers back to the oneness of Jews and Gentiles and how believers from both groups form part of the one group that worships God, like the stones that form one temple.
-3:1	jb9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τούτου χάριν	1	The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+3:1	jb9u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τούτου χάριν	1	The connecting phrase **for this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 3:1	abd6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτου χάριν	1	You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace to you” You may also need to make explicit here what the result is, as in the UST, because Paul does not state the result until 3:14, that he prays for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 3:1	m9b6			ὁ δέσμιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	“the one who is in prison because I serve Christ Jesus”
 3:2	rx7t			τὴν οἰκονομίαν τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ, τῆς δοθείσης μοι εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	Here**, grace** could refer to (1) the gift of the gospel that Paul is bringing to the Gentiles, and you could translate, “the responsibility that God gave me to bring his grace to you” or (2) the gift to Paul of being the steward of the gospel for the Gentiles, and you could translate that as “the responsibility that God graciously gave me for your benefit.”
@@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 3:12	ab6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ προσαγωγὴν	1	These two words work together to express one idea: “bold access” or “boldness to enter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 3:12	zx5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	προσαγωγὴν ἐν πεποιθήσει	1	It may be helpful to state explicitly that this access is into God’s presence. Alternate translation: “access into God’s presence with confidence” or “freedom to enter into God’s presence with confidence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 3:12	kri2			πεποιθήσει	1	“certainty” or “assurance”
-3:13	abd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the believers have access to Christ with confidence. The result is that the believers will not be discouraged. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+3:13	abd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the believers have access to Christ with confidence. The result is that the believers will not be discouraged. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 3:13	ciu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἥτις ἐστὶν δόξα ὑμῶν	1	Here, **your glory** is a metonym for the salvation and eternal life that the Ephesians will have because of Paul’s work of telling them about Christ, which resulted in his suffering in prison. This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “for you. They bring you a wonderful benefit” or “for you. They result in your salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-3:14	abd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τούτου χάριν	1	The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Paul’s sufferings have caused glory for the believers. The result is that Paul prays to the Father. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+3:14	abd5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	τούτου χάριν	1	The connecting phrase **for this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Paul’s sufferings have caused glory for the believers. The result is that Paul prays to the Father. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 3:14	v3gd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τούτου χάριν	1	You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because God has done all this for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 3:14	vju2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	κάμπτω τὰ γόνατά μου πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα	1	Bent knees are a picture of the whole person in an attitude of prayer. Alternate translation: “I bow down in prayer to the Father” or “I humbly pray to the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 3:15	c492		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐξ οὗ πᾶσα πατριὰ ἐν οὐρανοῖς καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς ὀνομάζεται	1	The act of naming here probably also represents the act of creating. Alternate translation: “who created and named every family in heaven and on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -205,14 +205,14 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 3:19	cd4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα πληρωθῆτε	1	This can be stated actively. Alternate translation: “so that God can fill you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:19	ef4z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰς πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	**Fullness** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “with everything that God is full of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 3:19	abd9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the Ephesian believers would know the love of Christ. The result is that they would be filled with the fulness of God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-3:20	jk5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The words “we” and “us” in this book continue to include Paul and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:20	jk5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “we” and “us” in this book continue to include Paul and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:20	m7gi				0	Paul concludes his prayer with a blessing.
 3:20	zxj3			τῷ δὲ	1	“Now to God, who”
 3:20	zxt3			ποιῆσαι ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν	1	“to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about”
-3:21	ab11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	**Glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+3:21	ab12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	**Glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:intro	ang8				0	# Ephesians 04 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual gifts\nSpiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Unity\nPaul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Old man and new man\nThe term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
 4:1	sb64				0	Because of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other.
-4:1	abda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will be glorified in the church for all generations. The result is that believers should walk in a way that is worthy of the Lord. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:1	abda		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will be glorified in the church for all generations. The result is that believers should walk in a way that is worthy of the Lord. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 4:1	uss5			ὁ δέσμιος ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	“someone who is in prison because he serves the Lord”
 4:1	zxr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀξίως περιπατῆσαι τῆς κλήσεως	1	**to walk** is a common way to express the idea of living one’s life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:1	abc5			τῆς κλήσεως ἧς ἐκλήθητε	1	Here, **the calling** refers to the fact that God chose them to be his people. Alternate translation: “because God chose you to be his people”
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:7	i4za				0	Paul reminds believers of the gifts that Christ gives believers to use in the church, which is the whole body of believers.
 4:7	u2bw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἑνὶ & ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἐδόθη ἡ χάρις	1	This can be stated using an active form. Alternate translation: “God has given grace to each one of us” or “God gave a gift to each believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:7	abbw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἑνὶ & ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἐδόθη ἡ χάρις	1	**Grace** is an abstract noun that refers here to a gift from God. Alternate translation: “God has given a gift to each believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-4:8	abdb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that every believer has been given a spiritual gift. The result is that the Scripture says Jesus gave gifts to men. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:8	abdb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that every believer has been given a spiritual gift. The result is that the Scripture says Jesus gave gifts to men. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 4:8	wj8t			ἀναβὰς εἰς ὕψος	1	“When Christ went up into heaven”
 4:9	e5at			ἀνέβη	1	“Christ went up”
 4:9	zu81			καὶ κατέβη	1	“Christ also came down”
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:14	xgi4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὦμεν νήπιοι	1	Paul refers to believers who have not grown spiritually as if they were children who have had very little experience in life. Alternate translation: “be like children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:14	ndj2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κλυδωνιζόμενοι καὶ περιφερόμενοι παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκαλίας	1	Paul speaks of a believer who has not become mature and follows various wrong teachings as if that believer were a boat and the teachings were the wind and waves that move the boat in different directions on the water. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:14	r3bj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ κυβίᾳ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἐν πανουργίᾳ πρὸς τὴν μεθοδίαν τῆς πλάνης	1	**Trickery**, **cleverness**, and **scheming** are abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “by crafty people who trick believers with clever lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-4:15	abdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Following every changing teaching is in contrast to becoming mature in Christ and building up his body. Use a word in your language that indicates contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:15	abdd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Following every changing teaching is in contrast to becoming mature in Christ and building up his body. Use a word in your language that indicates contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 4:15	ab88		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθεύοντες	1	**Truth** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “speaking truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:15	i2ff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	**Love** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “as the members love one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:15	zw32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς αὐτὸν & ὅς ἐστιν ἡ κεφαλή	1	Paul uses a metaphor of the human body to describe how Christ causes believers to work together in harmony as the head of a body causes the body parts to work together to grow in a healthy way. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:16	abff		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	**Love** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “as the members love one another” or “to be able to love each other more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:16	l5r6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ πάσης ἁφῆς τῆς ἐπιχορηγίας	1	Paul continues the metaphor comparing the believers to a human body. A **ligament** is a strong band that connects bones or holds organs in place in the body. Just as the body is held together by strong ligaments, so the believers are held together by love that grows stronger as the body parts grow and work together. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:17	n5cy				0	Paul tells them what they should no longer do now that they, as believers, are sealed by the Holy Spirit of God.
-4:17	abde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ wants every believer to become spiritually mature and to serve the other believers. The result is that the Ephesian believers should no longer act as the Gentiles act. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:17	abde		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ wants every believer to become spiritually mature and to serve the other believers. The result is that the Ephesian believers should no longer act as the Gentiles act. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 4:17	ksr8			τοῦτο οὖν λέγω καὶ μαρτύρομαι	1	“Because of what I have just said, I will now say something more in order to strongly encourage you”
 4:17	abr8			ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	This could mean either (1) “with the authority of the Lord” or (2) “because we all belong to the Lord.”
 4:17	wcx2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μηκέτι ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν, καθὼς καὶ τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ ἐν ματαιότητι τοῦ νοὸς αὐτῶν	1	Paul commonly uses this metaphor that compares walking to living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to stop living like the Gentiles with their worthless thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:18	abdg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ	2	The connecting word **because** introduces a reason-result relationship. The second reason is that their hearts are hardened. The result is that Gentiles are separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 4:19	ldy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἑαυτοὺς παρέδωκαν τῇ ἀσελγείᾳ	1	Paul speaks of these people as if they were objects that they themselves were giving to other people, and he speaks of the way that they want to satisfy their physical desires as if the desires were the person to whom they give themselves. Alternate translation: “have given in to every physical desire” or “only want to satisfy their physical desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:20	e5vk			ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐμάθετε τὸν Χριστόν	1	The word **thus** refers to the way that the Gentiles live, as described in [Ephesians 4:17-19](../04/17.md). This emphasizes that what the believers learned from Christ was the opposite of that. Alternate translation: “but what you learned about the ways of Christ was not like that”
-4:20	abdh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The sinful way the Gentiles live is in contrast to the way that Paul taught the Ephesians to live according to the truth of Jesus. Use a connecting word in your language that marks a contrast here (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:20	abdh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. The sinful way the Gentiles live is in contrast to the way that Paul taught the Ephesians to live according to the truth of Jesus. Use a connecting word in your language that marks a contrast here (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 4:21	hy7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	εἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατε καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε	1	Paul knows that the people to whom he is writing have heard and been taught these things. He is using irony as a form of rebuke—if they are doing things contrary to the way of Christ, they know better than that and need to stop. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 4:21	b3pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε	1	This can be stated in active form. Possible meanings are (1) “received instruction in his ways” or (2) “Jesus’ people have taught you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:21	gdz6			καθώς ἐστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	“as Jesus teaches us the true way to live” or “as everything about Jesus is true” See the UST.
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:23	jy7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἀνανεοῦσθαι & τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν	1	This may be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “to allow God to change your attitudes and thoughts” or “to allow God to give you new attitudes and thoughts” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:24	x41y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας	1	**Righteousness**, **holiness**, and **truth** are abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “truly righteous and holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:24	abc7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθαι τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον	1	Paul continues to speak of a way of living as if it were a person, and also as if it were clothing, so that one could **put on** the new person like a robe. Alternate translation: “be the new person” or “start living in the new way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-4:25	abdi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God has created the believers as new, holy people. The result is that they would stop acting immorally like they used to live. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+4:25	abdi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God has created the believers as new, holy people. The result is that they would stop acting immorally like they used to live. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 4:25	abn8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθέμενοι τὸ ψεῦδος	1	Paul speaks of telling lies as if they were objects that the believers could set aside. Alternate translation: “no longer telling lies” or “instead of telling lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:25	ab23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	λαλεῖτε ἀλήθειαν	1	**Truth** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “speak truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:25	abdj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **because** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that believers are members of the same body of Christ. The result is that believers should speak the truth to each other. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:26	w8rw			ὀργίζεσθε, καὶ μὴ ἁμαρτάνετε	1	“You may get angry, but do not sin” or “If you become angry, do not sin”
 4:26	ki7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὁ ἥλιος μὴ ἐπιδυέτω ἐπὶ παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν	1	The sun going down represents nightfall or the end of the day. Alternate translation: “you must stop being angry before night comes” or “let go of your anger before the day ends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 4:27	w71s			μηδὲ δίδοτε τόπον τῷ διαβόλῳ	1	“and do not give the devil an opportunity to lead you into sin”
-4:28	abdk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μᾶλλον δὲ	1	The connecting phrase **But rather** introduces a contrast relationship. The way a former thief should work hard to have something to share with others is in contrast to the way he formerly stole for himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:28	abdk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μᾶλλον δὲ	1	The connecting phrase **but rather** introduces a contrast relationship. The way a former thief should work hard to have something to share with others is in contrast to the way he formerly stole for himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 4:28	abdl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of working hard with ones own hands is to be able to meet the needs of others. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 4:29	f6yk			λόγος σαπρὸς	1	This refers to speech that is cruel or rude.
 4:29	abdm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. Speaking what is corrupt is in contrast to speaking good things that will build up others. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -307,17 +307,17 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 4:31	v576		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀρθήτω	1	Paul speaks of attitudes and behaviors as though they were physical objects that can be removed. Alternate translation: “you must not allow … to be part of your life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:31	t1gj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	πικρία, καὶ θυμὸς, καὶ ὀργὴ	1	These are abstract nouns that can be expressed as adjectives. Alternate translation: “being bitter, and intensely angry, and angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 4:31	abgj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	κακίᾳ	1	**Malice** is an abstract noun that can be expressed as an adjective. Alternate translation: “being malicious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-4:32	abdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Speaking angry and hurtful things is in contrast to speaking kind and tender things to one another. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+4:32	abdo		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Speaking angry and hurtful things is in contrast to speaking kind and tender things to one another. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 4:32	w7tk			εὔσπλαγχνοι	1	“gentle and compassionate towards others”
 5:intro	tdd2				0	# Ephesians 05 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 14.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Inheritance of the kingdom of Christ\n\nSome scholars believe that those who continue to practice the things listed in 5:5 will not inherit eternal life. But God can forgive all the sins listed in this verse. Immoral, impure, or greedy people can still receive eternal life if they repent and believe in Jesus. God will be the one who decides this. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Wives, submit to your husbands\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they interpret this issue affect how they translate this passage.
 5:1	wus5				0	Paul continues to tell the believers how they should and should not live as God’s children.
 5:1	jx2q			γίνεσθε οὖν μιμηταὶ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	**Imitators** is a verbal noun, and can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “Therefore, imitate God” or “Therefore you should do what God does.”
-5:1	abdp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason (stated in [Ephesians 4:32](../04/32.md)) is that God has forgiven us through Christ. The result (stated here) is that believers should imitate what God is like. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:1	abdp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason (stated in [Ephesians 4:32](../04/32.md)) is that God has forgiven us through Christ. The result (stated here) is that believers should imitate what God is like. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:1	zen5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά	1	God desires us to imitate or follow him since we are his spiritual children. Alternate translation: “as dearly loved children imitate their fathers” or “because you are his children and he loves you dearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 5:2	ta41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιπατεῖτε ἐν ἀγάπῃ	1	To **walk** is a common way to express the idea of living one’s life. Alternate translation: “live a life of love” or “always love each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:2	bak1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	προσφορὰν καὶ θυσίαν τῷ Θεῷ εἰς ὀσμὴν εὐωδίας	1	This metaphor compares Christ dying on the cross for our sins with the Old Testament sacrifices for sin, which were roasted in a fire and gave off a pleasing smell. Alternate translation: “like a sweet-smelling offering and sacrifice to God” or “an offering and sacrifice to God that pleased God very much” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:3	le5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πορνεία δὲ, καὶ ἀκαθαρσία πᾶσα, ἢ πλεονεξία, μηδὲ ὀνομαζέσθω ἐν ὑμῖν	1	This can be stated in an active form: “Do not do anything that would let anyone think that you are guilty of sexual immorality or any kind of impurity or greed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-5:3	abdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The fragrant offering and sacrifice to God is in contrast to sinful acts and thoughts that are not fitting for saints. Use a connecting word that indicates a contrast in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+5:3	abdq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. The fragrant offering and sacrifice to God is in contrast to sinful acts and thoughts that are not fitting for saints. Use a connecting word that indicates a contrast in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 5:3	xat9			ἀκαθαρσία πᾶσα	1	“any moral uncleanness”
 5:4	utm5			ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον εὐχαριστία	1	**Thanksgiving** is a verbal noun, and can be translated with a verb: “Instead of those things, you should thank God”
 5:4	abdr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον	1	The connecting phrase **but instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Sinful acts and thoughts are in contrast to thanksgiving to God. Use a connecting word that indicates a contrast in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 5:6	abds		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	The connecting word **for** introduces a reason-result relationship. The result is stated first: that the Ephesian believers should not let anyone deceive them with empty words. Then the reason is stated: that the wrath of God will judge those things. Use a phrase that connects a reason to a result, and put them in the order that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:6	ab16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔρχεται ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ	1	**Wrath** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 5:6	ab73		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τοὺς υἱοὺς τῆς ἀπειθείας	1	This is an idiom that means, “people who habitually disobey” or “people who are characterized by disobedience” Alternate translation: “those who disobey God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-5:7	abdt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will judge those people in his wrath. The result is that the Ephesian believers should not become partners with evil men. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:7	abdt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will judge those people in his wrath. The result is that the Ephesian believers should not become partners with evil men. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:8	wy9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἦτε γάρ ποτε σκότος	1	Just as one cannot see in the dark, so people who love to sin cannot see or understand the things of God. Alternate translation: “because formerly you did not understand anything about God” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:8	abdw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	The connecting word **because** introduces a reason-result relationship. The result is stated first (v.7): that the Ephesian believers should not become partners with evil men. The reason is stated second (v. 8): that the Ephesian believers are no longer darkness, but are now light. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result, using the order that is most natural for your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:8	iw4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	νῦν δὲ φῶς ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Just as one can see in the light, so people whom God has saved understand how to please God. Alternate translation: “but now you know God and can live for him” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -343,9 +343,9 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 5:11	hpl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐλέγχετε	1	Speaking against the works of darkness is spoken of as bringing them out into the light so that people can see them. Alternate translation: “bring them out into the light” or “uncover them” or “show and tell people how wrong these actions are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:12	cd23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	**Them** here refers to the **sons of disobedience** mentioned in 5:6 and also referred to as **them** in 5:7. If it is unclear who **them** refers to in either place, then use “those who disobey God” or a similar phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 5:13	sp1z				0	It is unknown if this quotation is a combination of quotations from the prophet Isaiah or a quotation from a hymn sung by the believers.
-5:13	abdy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. Hiding the shameful works of darkness now is in contrast to the light exposing them later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+5:13	abdy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. Hiding the shameful works of darkness now is in contrast to the light exposing them later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 5:13	vqi7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πᾶν & τὸ φανερούμενον φῶς ἐστιν	1	Paul makes this general statement in order to imply that God’s Word shows people’s actions to be good or bad. The Bible often speaks of God’s truth as if it were light that could reveal the character of something. Alternate translation: “if you compare everything to what God says, you can know if it is good or bad” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-5:14	abdz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that their sins will be revealed by the light. The result is that sinners should allow Christ to shine on them. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:14	abdz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that their sins will be revealed by the light. The result is that sinners should allow Christ to shine on them. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:14	z4ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe	ἔγειρε, ὁ καθεύδων, καὶ ἀνάστα ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν	1	Possible meanings are: (1) Paul is addressing the believers and using death as a metaphor for their areas of spiritual weakness that they need to become aware of and reject, or (2) Paul is addressing unbelievers who need to wake up from being dead spiritually just as a person who has died must come alive again in order to respond. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 5:14	abcl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe	ὁ καθεύδων	1	Paul addresses this comment directly to either (1) the believers who are reading or hearing the letter, or (2) to unbelievers who are not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
 5:14	e873		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν	1	This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To arise from among them speaks of becoming alive again and is a metaphor for becoming alive spiritually and living for God. Alternate Translation: “from among all those who have died” or “from among those who are spiritually dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -358,13 +358,13 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 5:16	h8b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐξαγοραζόμενοι τὸν καιρόν	1	Using time wisely is spoken of as if it were redeeming the time. Alternate translation: “doing the best things you can with your time” or “using time wisely” or “putting time to its best use” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:16	lrb6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅτι αἱ ἡμέραι πονηραί εἰσιν	1	The word **days** is a metonym for what people do during those days. Alternate translation: “because the people around you are constantly doing all kinds of evil things and the opportunities that you have to do good may become few” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 5:16	abe3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **because** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the days are evil. The result is that the believers must redeem the time. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-5:17	abe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the days are evil. The result is that the believers will not be foolish, but understand God’s will. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:17	abe4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the days are evil. The result is that the believers will not be foolish, but understand God’s will. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:17	abe5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. Being foolish is in contrast to understanding God’s will. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 5:18	tz9e				0	Paul ends his instructions on how all believers should live.
 5:18	scp1			καὶ μὴ μεθύσκεσθε οἴνῳ	1	“You should not get drunk from drinking wine”
 5:18	cd33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ᾧ ἐστιν ἀσωτία	1	**Recklessness** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “which leads to reckless behavior” or “because that will ruin you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 5:18	lgw3			ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθε ἐν Πνεύματι	1	“Instead, you should be controlled by the Holy Spirit”
-5:18	abe6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Being drunk is in contrast to being filled with the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+5:18	abe6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Being drunk is in contrast to being filled with the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 5:19	egk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	ψαλμοῖς, καὶ ὕμνοις, καὶ ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς	1	Possible meanings are that: (1) Paul is using these words as a merism for “all sorts of songs to praise God” or (2) Paul is listing specific forms of music. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 5:19	n5jj			ψαλμοῖς	1	These are probably songs from the Old Testament book of Psalms that Christians sang.
 5:19	g5ss			ὕμνοις	1	These are songs of praise and worship that may have been written specifically for Christians to sing.
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 5:20	e6w5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Here, **name** may represent (1) Jesus himself, Alternate translation: “because you belong to our Lord Jesus Christ” or (2) the authority of Jesus, Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:20	abw5			τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί	1	“to God, who is our father”
 5:22	isd7				0	Paul begins to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to one another ([Ephesians 5:21](../05/21.md)). He starts with instructions to wives and husbands on how they should act toward each other.
-5:23	abe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **For** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the husband is head of the wife in the same way Christ is head of the church. The result is that wives should submit to their husbands. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:23	abe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **for** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the husband is head of the wife in the same way Christ is head of the church. The result is that wives should submit to their husbands. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 5:23	x637		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κεφαλὴ τῆς γυναικὸς & κεφαλὴ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	The word **head** here represents the leader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:23	abc1			τοῦ σώματος	1	The church is often referred to as the body of Christ.
 5:25	sx8d				0	Here the words **himself** and **he** refer to Christ. The word **her** refers to the church.
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 5:30	h44f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μέλη ἐσμὲν τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ	1	Here Paul speaks of the close union of believers with Christ as if they were part of his own body, for which he would naturally care. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:31	yp23				0	The quotation is from the writings of Moses in the Old Testament.
 5:31	yp24				0	The words **his** and **himself** refer to a male believer who marries.
-5:31	abef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀντὶ τούτου	1	The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. In this case, this phrase is part of a quotation from Genesis 2:24 and so the reason is not stated here, but it is stated in Genesis 2:23 that woman was created out of man. The result is that a man will leave his father and mother and be joined to his wife. If it is confusing to not state the reason, you can include a footnote that says, “the reason for this is that woman was created out of man. See Genesis 2:23” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+5:31	abef		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀντὶ τούτου	1	The connecting phrase **for this reason** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. In this case, this phrase is part of a quotation from Genesis 2:24 and so the reason is not stated here, but it is stated in Genesis 2:23 that woman was created out of man. The result is that a man will leave his father and mother and be joined to his wife. If it is confusing to not state the reason, you can include a footnote that says, “the reason for this is that woman was created out of man. See Genesis 2:23” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 6:intro	r7c3				0	# Ephesians 06 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Slavery\nPaul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Armor of God\nThis extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:1	wq46		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	The command in verse one is plural. Then in verses two and three Paul quotes from the law of Moses. Moses was talking to the people of Israel as though they were one person, so **your** and **you** are singular there. If that does not make sense, you may need to translate them as plurals. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 6:1	jf17				0	Paul continues to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to each other. He gives instructions to children, fathers, workers, and masters.
@@ -404,14 +404,14 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 6:1	abeg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1	The connecting word **for** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that children should do what is right. The result is that children should obey their parents. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 6:3	abeh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of obeying your father and mother is to live well and long on the earth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 6:4	bb7g			μὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν	1	“do not make your children angry” or “do not cause your children to be angry”
-6:4	abei		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Fathers provoking their children to anger is in contrast to raising their children in discipline and instruction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+6:4	abei		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Fathers provoking their children to anger is in contrast to raising their children in discipline and instruction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 6:4	ytg5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐκτρέφετε αὐτὰ ἐν παιδείᾳ καὶ νουθεσίᾳ Κυρίου	1	The abstract nouns **discipline** and **instruction** can be expressed as verbs. Alternate translation: “teach them to become adults by making sure that they know and do what the Lord wants them to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:5	s1pq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	The phrase **fear and trembling** uses two similar ideas to emphasize the importance of honoring their masters. Alternate translation: “with deep respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 6:5	z6xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	καὶ τρόμου	1	Here, **trembling** is an exaggeration used to emphasize how important it is that slaves obey their masters. Alternate translation: “and deep respect” or “as though you were shaking with fear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 6:5	pd6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν ἁπλότητι τῆς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or intentions. Alternate translation: “with honesty” or “with sincerity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 6:5	ab6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἁπλότητι	1	**Honesty** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “honestly” or “sincerely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:5	cd6z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς τῷ Χριστῷ	1	To make this clear, you may want to include the verb here: “as you obey Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-6:6	abej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. Obeying our masters as men-pleasers is in contrast to obeying them because we are slaves of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+6:6	abej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. Obeying our masters as men-pleasers is in contrast to obeying them because we are slaves of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 6:6	l9ve			ὡς δοῦλοι Χριστοῦ	1	“as though your earthly master were Christ himself”
 6:6	u5fn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐκ ψυχῆς	1	Here, **soul** is a metonym for “attitudes” or “intentions.” Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly” or “enthusiastically” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 6:9	i85s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τὰ αὐτὰ ποιεῖτε πρὸς αὐτούς	1	**The same** refers back to “if he does something good” from ([Ephesians 6:8](../06/08.md)). Alternate translation: “you also must treat your slaves well” or “just as slaves must do good to their masters, you also must do good to your slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -421,32 +421,32 @@ front:intro	e3di				0	# Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 6:10	e4mg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	τῷ κράτει τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ	1	These two words are very similar in meaning. Together, they reinforce each other. Alternate translation: “his great power” See how you translated this phrase near the end of [Ephesians 1:19](../01/19.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 6:11	n8x8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑμᾶς στῆναι πρὸς τὰς μεθοδίας τοῦ διαβόλου	1	In this metaphor, Paul pictures the spiritual resources that God gives to all Christians as a soldier’s armor. Alternate translation: “just as a soldier puts on armor to protect himself from enemy attacks, use all of God’s resources to stand firmly against the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:11	ra3y			τὰς μεθοδίας	1	“the tricky plans”
-6:12	abek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **For** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that we are in a struggle against spiritual forces of darkness. The result is that we should put on the whole armor of God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:12	abek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	The connecting word **for** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that we are in a struggle against spiritual forces of darkness. The result is that we should put on the whole armor of God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 6:12	d7be		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	αἷμα καὶ σάρκα	1	This expression refers to people, not spirits who do not have human bodies. Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-6:12	abel		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. People made of flesh and blood are in contrast to spiritual forces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+6:12	abel		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast relationship. People made of flesh and blood are in contrast to spiritual forces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 6:12	ftu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς τοὺς κοσμοκράτορας	1	Here it is implied that **the world-controllers** refers to powerful spiritual beings. Alternate translation: “against the powerful spiritual beings that rule over people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 6:12	abcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῦ σκότους τούτου	1	Here, **darkness** is a metaphor for things that are evil. Alternate translation: “during this present evil time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:13	jrn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τοῦτο, ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Christians should use the protective resources God gives them in fighting the devil in the same way that a soldier puts on armor to protect himself against his enemies. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-6:13	abem		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The connecting word **Therefore** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that we are in a battle against evil spiritual forces. The result is that we should put on the whole armor of God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:13	abem		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that we are in a battle against evil spiritual forces. The result is that we should put on the whole armor of God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 6:13	cy9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα δυνηθῆτε ἀντιστῆναι ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ πονηρᾷ	1	The word **withstand** means to successfully resist something. Alternate translation: “so that you may be able to resist when evil attacks you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:13	ab9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα δυνηθῆτε ἀντιστῆναι	1	It may be helpful to state explicitly what believers are to withstand. Alternate translation: “so that you may be able to withstand the attacks of the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 6:13	aben		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of putting on the whole armor of God is to be able to withstand the attacks of the spiritual forces of darkness. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 6:14	r5m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	στῆτε οὖν	1	Here the word **stand** represents taking a position on what is right and true and successfully resisting forces that try to make the believer compromise that position. See how you translated **stand firm** in [Ephesians 6:13](../06/13.md). “So resist evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-6:14	aben		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that we believers have put on our spiritual armor. The result is that we will stand and resist the evil spiritual forces. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+6:14	abex		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	The connecting word **therefore** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that we believers have put on our spiritual armor. The result is that we will stand and resist the evil spiritual forces. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 6:14	lbd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	περιζωσάμενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑμῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	In this metaphor, truth is compared to a soldier’s belt. Truth holds everything together for a believer just as a belt holds the clothing of a soldier together. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-6:14	abd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείᾳ	1	**Truth** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:14	abq4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀληθείᾳ	1	**Truth** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:14	abca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσάμενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	In this metaphor, righteousness is compared to a soldier’s breastplate. Just as soldiers put on a breastplate to protect themselves from enemy attacks, believers should behave in a righteous way to protect themselves from spiritual attacks. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:14	cdca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	δικαιοσύνης	1	**Righteousness** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “the right way to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:15	f6w1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὑποδησάμενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιμασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς εἰρήνης	1	In this metaphor, **the gospel of peace** is compared to a soldier’s sandals. Just as a soldier wears sturdy footwear to give him solid footing and enable him to march long distances, the believer must have solid knowledge of the gospel of peace and be ready to go where the Lord sends him to proclaim it. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:15	abw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνης	1	**Peace** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “making everything good between people and God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:16	n65c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως	1	In this metaphor, faith is compared to a soldier’s shield. Just as a soldier uses a shield to protect himself from enemy attacks, the believer must use the faith that God gives for protection when the devil attacks. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-6:16	ab5c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	**Faith** is an abstract noun that can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “that represents how much you trust in the Lord” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+6:16	ab5d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1	**Faith** is an abstract noun that can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “that represents how much you trust in the Lord” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:16	djl5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὰ βέλη τοῦ πονηροῦ πεπυρωμένα	1	The attacks of the devil against a believer are like **flaming arrows** shot at a soldier by an enemy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:17	g2kw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν περικεφαλαίαν τοῦ σωτηρίου δέξασθε	1	Salvation given by God protects the believer’s mind just as a **helmet** protects the head of a soldier. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:17	abkw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ σωτηρίου	1	**Salvation** is an abstract noun that can be translated with a verb. Alternate Translation: “that represents the fact that God has saved you” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:17	c191		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὴν μάχαιραν τοῦ Πνεύματος, ὅ ἐστιν ῥῆμα Θεοῦ	1	In this metaphor, God’s message is compared to a soldier’s **sword**. Just as soldiers use a sword to fight and defeat their enemy, so a believer can use God’s message in the Bible to fight against the devil. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:18	mu4w			διὰ πάσης προσευχῆς καὶ δεήσεως, προσευχόμενοι ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ ἐν Πνεύματι	1	“Pray at all times in the Spirit as you pray and make specific requests”
-6:18	g1i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς αὐτὸ	1	The connecting phrase **To this end** marks a goal or purpose relationship. The goal is what was just mentioned: to pray at all times in the Spirit. In order to do that, believers must be watchful and persevere in making requests for all the saints. Alternate Translation: “For this reason” or “In order to do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+6:18	g1i7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς αὐτὸ	1	The connecting phrase **to this end** marks a goal or purpose relationship. The goal is what was just mentioned: to pray at all times in the Spirit. In order to do that, believers must be watchful and persevere in making requests for all the saints. Alternate Translation: “For this reason” or “In order to do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 6:18	i5hm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἀγρυπνοῦντες ἐν πάσῃ προσκαρτερήσει καὶ δεήσει περὶ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων	1	**Perseverance** is an abstract noun that can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “persevere in being alert, and pray for all God’s holy people” or “pray with constant alertness for all the believers” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 6:19	rm1h				0	In closing this letter, Paul asks his readers to pray for his boldness in telling the gospel while he is in prison and he says that he is sending Tychicus to comfort them.
 6:19	j135		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα μοι δοθῇ λόγος	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that God might give me the word” or “God might give me the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

tn_EST.tsv

@@ -248,12 +248,12 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 2:14	abe9			חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ	1	This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”
 2:14	abf0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם	1	You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2:15	fiy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ	1	The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12-14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-2:15	jk51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת	1	This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+2:15	jk51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת	1	This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2:15	mg8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲבִיחַ֣יִל	1	This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 2:15	qx3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י	1	You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 2:15	vw9r			אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י	1	Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”
 2:15	abf1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י	1	As the king’s personal servant, **Hegai** would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you can make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2:15	abf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים	1	This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+2:15	abf2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים	1	This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2:15	abf3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	See how you decided to translate the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” for “of the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 2:15	z519		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ	1	This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2:15	jd87		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י	1	Here, **eyes** is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 3:10	abl9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן	1	**Giving the ring to Haman** showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 3:10	c9md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ	1	This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 3:10	abm0			בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י	1	This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.
-3:10	abm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+3:10	abm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 3:11	sz4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:11	abm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ	1	Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that **he can do whatever he wants to the Jews**. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:12	hx6c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 5:12	abv9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 5:13	abw0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙	1	This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “… does not satisfy me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:13	wu84			וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה	1	Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”
-5:13	abw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+5:13	abw1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 5:13	abw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 5:13	abw3			בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
 5:14	abw4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו	1	The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be clearer, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 8:intro	z6j7				0	# Esther 08 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### God’s protection\nYahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
 8:1	j8d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא	1	This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 8:1	j8d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן	1	Here, **house** figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-8:1	nm3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+8:1	nm3u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 8:1	acc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 8:1	j8d9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ	1	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 8:1	acd0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ	1	Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her” You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST.\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
@@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 9:8	g6zx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פּוֹרָ֛תָא & אֲדַלְיָ֖א & אֲרִידָֽתָא	1	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 9:9	gj4p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙ & אֲרִיסַ֔י & אֲרִדַ֖י & וַיְזָֽתָא	1	These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 9:10	fsa2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י	1	Alternate translation: “the 10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-9:10	xt5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+9:10	xt5b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 9:10	j19d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם	1	Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 9:10	ack7			וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”
 9:11	ack8			בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא	1	Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”
@@ -989,7 +989,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 9:23	ib25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events	אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת	1	Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way.” You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
 9:24	j119		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּי֩	1	This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 9:24	kqf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּי֩	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you can say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-9:24	j125		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+9:24	j125		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 9:24	aco9			חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם	1	Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”
 9:24	xz7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל	1	You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 9:24	bcy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל	1	As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1032,10 +1032,10 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 9:28	acq7			מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”
 9:28	i2qk			וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף	1	Alternate translation: “will always observe”
 9:28	j155		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם	1	As in verse 27, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-9:29	je8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל	1	This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+9:29	je8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל	1	This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 9:29	cm8c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֲבִיחַ֛יִל	1	This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 9:29	oc4c			וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י	1	Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of **Mordecai** here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”
-9:29	acq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י	1	This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+9:29	acq8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י	1	This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 9:29	acq9			תִּכְתֹּב & אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף	1	Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”
 9:29	ku7d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית	1	**This second letter of Purim** could refer to (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (see verses 20-22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 9:30	acr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים	1	While this says “**he**,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 9:30	iaf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	The abstract nouns **peace** and **truth** can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 9:30	mpse			דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת	1	The Hebrew word translated as **truth** here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”
 9:31	acr4			לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה	1	Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”
-9:31	rgr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+9:31	rgr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 9:31	acr5			וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם	1	This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in [2:6](../02/06.md).) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.
 9:31	rl2s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם	1	Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 9:32	acr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ front:intro	d989				0	# Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 10:2	acs6			הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים	1	Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse if that would be clearer in your language.
 10:2	acs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס	1	See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 10:3	j159		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּ֣י	1	This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-10:3	acs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+10:3	acs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י	1	This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 10:3	acs9			מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ	1	Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”
 10:3	act0			וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים	1	Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”
 10:3	iui7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	אֶחָ֑י⁠ו	1	Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

tn_EZK.tsv

@@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ front:intro	wb5b				0	# Introduction to Ezekiel\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 21:10	f22c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	These can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I will sharpen it…I will polish it so that it will” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 21:10	d5jv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	This means that the sword will be so shiny that light reflects off of it easily and brightly. Alternate translation: “so that it flashes like lightning” or “so that light reflects off of it as brightly as lightning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 21:10	l8t7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		0	This rhetorical question emphasizes that the people of Israel will not celebrate their king’s power, because it cannot resist the “sword.” Alternate translation: “The people of Judah will not celebrate about their king’s scepter.” or “we should not celebrate the power of our king’s scepter.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-21:10	vq6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “we” refers to Ezekiel and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+21:10	vq6m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” refers to Ezekiel and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 21:10	kyj2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	Here Yahweh refers to the king of Judah as his son. The king’s scepter represents his rule as king. It is important to maintain the image of the king’s scepter here, as the words “every such rod” refer to the scepter. Alternate translation: “in the king’s scepter” or “in the power that the king’s scepter represents” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 21:10	h3tv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification		0	Here the “sword” is personified as coming to attack the people. This speaks of the king not being able to resist the “sword”, as if the “sword” were hating the king’s scepter. Alternate translation: “the sword will overpower his scepter like that of any other ruler” or “for the king will not be able to resist when the sword is brought against him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 21:10	d6gp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony		0	This phrase is used to mock the king’s scepter by calling it a “rod.” Alternate translation: “such scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

tn_EZR.tsv

@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ front:intro	fa5r				0	# Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 2:59	ay8y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙ וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם אִ֥ם מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֖ל הֵֽם	1	These two longer phrases mean similar things. The second phrase explains the meaning of the first for clarity and emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translations: “that their ancestors had been Israelites” or “what clan they were from or who their ancestors were, whether they were really Israelites” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 2:59	jlej		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙ וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם	1	These two short phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that accurate records would be required to prove a person’s lineage. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “what their lineage was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2:59	an9o		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙	1	Among the Israelites, the expressions father’s house or **house of their fathers** originally described an extended-family group. It later came to be used more generally to refer to a larger clan within a tribe. In this expression, the word “house” figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “what clan they were from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2:59	yqp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם	1	Here, **seed** is a [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] meaning offspring**.** In the Bible, the term refers most often to a person’s descendants. Here it is describing the ancestors of these people, that is, whose seed they were. Alternate translation: “or who their ancestors were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+2:59	yqp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם	1	Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning "offspring." In the Bible, the term refers most often to a person’s descendants. Here it is describing the ancestors of these people, that is, whose seed they were. Alternate translation: “or who their ancestors were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:60	k7wr			בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א שֵׁ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁנָֽיִם׃	1	Alternate translation: “Altogether 652 men returned who were from the descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda”
 2:60	v01g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א	1	**Sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “The descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda” (See:[[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:60	xr2g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	דְלָיָ֥ה & טוֹבִיָּ֖ה & נְקוֹדָ֑א	1	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

tn_GAL.tsv

@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ front:intro	i6u9				0	# Introduction to Galatians\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 3:13	mt6z			ὁ κρεμάμενος ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	Paul expected his audience to understand that he was referring to Jesus hanging on the cross.
 3:14	brf7			ἵνα & ἡ εὐλογία τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ γένηται	1	“because Christ became a curse for us, the blessing of Abraham will come”
 3:14	fa98			ἵνα & λάβωμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	“because Christ became a curse for us, by faith we will receive”
-3:14	h46q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	λάβωμεν	1	The word “we” includes the people who would read the letter and so is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:14	h46q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λάβωμεν	1	The word “we” includes the people who would read the letter and so is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:15	al9b			ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md).
 3:15	c3gs			κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1	“as a person” or “of things most people understand”
 3:16	f1xu			δὲ	1	This word shows that Paul has stated a general principle and is now beginning to introduce a specific case.
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ front:intro	i6u9				0	# Introduction to Galatians\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 3:19	cf66		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	διαταγεὶς δι’ ἀγγέλων ἐν χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God issued the law with the help of angels, and a mediator put it into force” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:19	bgi6			χειρὶ μεσίτου	1	“a representative”
 3:20	x9l1			ὁ δὲ μεσίτης ἑνὸς οὐκ ἔστιν, ὁ δὲ Θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν	1	God gave his promise to Abraham without a mediator, but he gave the law to Moses with a mediator. As a result, Paul’s readers may have thought that the law somehow made the promise to no effect. Paul is stating what his readers might have thought here, and he will respond to them in the verses that follow.
-3:21	wes3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “us” in this section refers to all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:21	wes3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “us” in this section refers to all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:21	e43u			κατὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν	1	“opposed to the promises” or “in conflict with the promises”
 3:21	b8xx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	εἰ & ἐδόθη νόμος ὁ δυνάμενος ζῳοποιῆσαι	1	This can be stated in active form, and the abstract noun “life” can be translated with the verb “live.” Alternate translation: “if God had given a law that enabled those who kept it to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 3:21	iyg9			ἐν νόμου ἂν ἦν ἡ δικαιοσύνη	1	“we could have become righteous by obeying that law”
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ front:intro	i6u9				0	# Introduction to Galatians\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 4:1	n5yb			οὐδὲν διαφέρει	1	“the same as”
 4:2	bd5a			ἐπιτρόπους	1	people with legal responsibility for children
 4:2	v5g9			οἰκονόμους	1	people whom others trust to keep valuable items safe
-4:3	d6v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “we” here refers to all Christians, including Paul’s readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:3	d6v9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” here refers to all Christians, including Paul’s readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:3	n21q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὅτε ἦμεν νήπιοι	1	Here “children” is a metaphor for being spiritually immature. Alternate translation: “when we were like children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:3	cd2w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου ἤμεθα δεδουλωμένοι	1	Here “enslaved” is a metaphor being unable to stop one’s self from doing something. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the elemental principles of the world controlled us” or “we had to obey the elemental principles of the world as if we were slaves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:3	u462			τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου	1	Possible meanings are (1) this refers to the laws or moral principles of the world, or (2) this refers to spiritual powers, which some people thought control what happens on earth.
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ front:intro	i6u9				0	# Introduction to Galatians\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 5:4	h4yu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κατηργήθητε ἀπὸ Χριστοῦ	1	Here “cut off” is a metaphor for separation from Christ. Alternate translation: “You have ended your relationship with Christ” or “You are no longer united with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:4	ipf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony	οἵτινες ἐν νόμῳ δικαιοῦσθε	1	Paul is speaking ironically here. He actually teaches that no one can be justified by trying to do the deeds required by the law. Alternate translation: “all you who think you can be justified by doing the deeds required by the law” or “you who want to be justified by the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 5:4	k6xe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῆς χάριτος ἐξεπέσατε	1	Who that grace comes from can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “God will not be gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-5:5	pdm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Paul and those who oppose the circumcision of Christians. He is probably including the Galatians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:5	pdm1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to Paul and those who oppose the circumcision of Christians. He is probably including the Galatians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:5	vvk6			γὰρ Πνεύματι	1	“This is because through the Spirit”
 5:5	qg9m			ἡμεῖς & ἐκ πίστεως ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1	Possible meanings are (1) “we are waiting by faith for the hope of righteousness” or (2) “we are waiting for the hope of righteousness that comes by faith.”
 5:5	z3ga			ἡμεῖς & ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης ἀπεκδεχόμεθα	1	“we are waiting patiently and with excitement for God to put us right with himself forever, and we expect him to do it”

tn_GEN.tsv

@@ -2182,7 +2182,7 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 31:30	e3jc				0	“my idols”
 31:31	qd9f				0	“I left in secret because I was afraid that you would take your daughters from me by force”
 31:32	e35z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes		0	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We will kill whoever has stolen your gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-31:32	zh3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “our” refers to Jacob’s relatives and includes Laban’s relatives. All the relatives will watch to make sure everything is fair and honest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+31:32	zh3x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “our” refers to Jacob’s relatives and includes Laban’s relatives. All the relatives will watch to make sure everything is fair and honest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 31:32	l4l6				0	“look for whatever we have that is yours and take it”
 31:32	mjz6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	This changes from the story to background information about Jacob. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 31:33	rd4w				0	This refers to Zilpah and Bilhah.
@@ -2196,8 +2196,8 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 31:36	wcv8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	The phrases “What is my offense” and “What is my sin” mean basically the same thing. Jacob is asking Laban to tell him what he did wrong. Alternate translation: “What have I done wrong that you should pursue me like this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 31:36	rd64		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom		0	Here the word “hotly” means Laban urgently chased Jacob intending to capture him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 31:37	lf9u				0	“What have you found that belongs to you?”
-31:37	jgu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “our” refers to Jacob’s relatives and includes Laban’s relatives. Alternate translation: “Lay anything you have found in front of our relatives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
-31:37	q8tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “two of us” refers to Jacob and Laban. The phrase “to judge between” means to decide which person is right in a dispute. Alternate translation: “they may judge between the two of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+31:37	jgu5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “our” refers to Jacob’s relatives and includes Laban’s relatives. Alternate translation: “Lay anything you have found in front of our relatives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+31:37	q8tg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “two of us” refers to Jacob and Laban. The phrase “to judge between” means to decide which person is right in a dispute. Alternate translation: “they may judge between the two of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 31:38	l12d				0	Jacob continues to speak to Laban.
 31:38	a2zw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers		0	“20 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 31:38	rum5				0	female sheep
@@ -2384,7 +2384,7 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 34:19	ve5w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	This can be translated as a new sentence. It can be made explicit that Shechem knew the other men would agree to be circumcised because they greatly respected him. Alternate translation: “Shechem knew all the men in his father’s household would agree with him because he was the most honored among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 34:20	bl5k				0	It was common for leaders to meet at the city gate to make official decisions.
 34:21	ub3p				0	“Jacob, his sons, and the people of Israel”
-34:21	gg84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” includes Hamor, his son and all the people they spoke with at the city gate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+34:21	gg84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” includes Hamor, his son and all the people they spoke with at the city gate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 34:21	peg8				0	“let them live and trade in the land”
 34:21	qgk2				0	Shechem uses the word “really” to add emphasis to his statement. “because, certainly, the land is large enough for them” or “because, indeed, there is plenty of land for them”
 34:21	i8u8				0	This refers to marriages between the women of one group and the men of the other group. See how you translated similar phrases in [Genesis 34:9](../34/09.md).
@@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 37:6	c6ln				0	“Please listen to this dream that I had”
 37:7	hu4k				0	Joseph tells his brothers about his dream.
 37:7	zk8j				0	The word “behold” here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
-37:7	v7ub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “we” refers to Joseph and includes all of his brothers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+37:7	v7ub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” refers to Joseph and includes all of his brothers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 37:7	lp7e				0	When grain is reaped it is tied into bundles and stacked until it is time to separate the grain from the straw.
 37:7	p45z				0	Here the word “behold” here shows that Joseph was surprised by what he saw.
 37:7	yu7f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification		0	Here the bundles of grain are standing and kneeling as if they were people. These bundle represent Joseph and his brothers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -2781,7 +2781,7 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 39:15	n1kg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent		0	“When he heard me scream, he.” The phrase “it came about” is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 39:16	ma4z				0	“Joseph’s master.” This refers to Potiphar.
 39:17	xu1x				0	“She explained it like this”
-39:17	qu1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “us” refers to Potiphar, his wife, and includes the rest of the household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+39:17	qu1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “us” refers to Potiphar, his wife, and includes the rest of the household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 39:17	s2dj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism		0	“came in to make a fool of me.” Here, the word “mock” is a euphemism for “to seize and to sleep with.” Alternate translation: “came into where I was and tried to force me to sleep with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 39:18	u1cu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent		0	“Then.” Potiphar’s wife uses this phrase to mark the next event in the account she is telling him about Joseph trying to sleep with her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 39:18	r27a				0	“ran quickly out of the house”
@@ -3091,7 +3091,7 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 43:2	af37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent		0	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 43:2	j2pr				0	“when Jacob and his family had eaten”
 43:2	y9y8				0	“Jacob’s older sons had brought”
-43:2	cwa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Jacob, his sons, and the rest of the family. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+43:2	cwa3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Jacob, his sons, and the rest of the family. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 43:3	a11c				0	“Judah told his father Jacob”
 43:3	xp8m				0	This refers to Joseph, but the brothers did not know it was Joseph. They referred to him as “the man” or “the man, the lord of the land” as in [Genesis 42:30](../42/30.md).
 43:3	t3f5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes		0	This has a quotation within a quotation. It can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “warned us that we would not see his face unless we brought our youngest brother with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -3109,7 +3109,7 @@ front:intro	d9wn				0	# Introduction to Genesis\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
 43:7	v3xy				0	It was common to use the word “down” when speaking of traveling from Canaan to Egypt.
 43:8	l94l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	The phrases “we may live” and “not die” mean the same thing. Judah is emphasizing that they have to buy food in Egypt in order to survive. Alternate translation: “We will go now to Egypt and get grain so our whole family will live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 43:8	mh3d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “We” refers to the brothers who will travel to Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-43:8	k6f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the brothers, Israel, and the whole family. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+43:8	k6f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the brothers, Israel, and the whole family. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 43:8	cpz3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the brothers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 43:8	uy53		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here “you” is singular and refers to Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 43:8	tl69		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “our” refers to the brothers. This refers to the small children who were most likely to die during a famine. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

tn_HEB.tsv

@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:14	v541		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν	1	Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “for those whom God will save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:intro	s2gd				0	# Hebrews 02 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Brothers\n\nThe author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
 2:1	x7px				0	This is the first of five urgent warnings the author gives.
-2:1	c72f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	δεῖ & ἡμᾶς	1	Here “we” refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:1	c72f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δεῖ & ἡμᾶς	1	Here “we” refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:1	ayd1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	μήποτε παραρυῶμεν	1	Possible meanings for this metaphor are (1) people who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” or (2) people who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 2:2	j4fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ γὰρ ὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος	1	The Jews believed that God spoke his law to Moses through angels. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For if the message that God spoke through the angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 2:2	k5kb			εἰ γὰρ ὁ & λόγος	1	The author is certain that these things are true. Alternate translation: “Because the message”
@@ -143,14 +143,14 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 3:13	m1e7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	μὴ σκληρυνθῇ τις ἐξ ὑμῶν ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the deceitfulness of sin will not harden any of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:13	b198		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	μὴ σκληρυνθῇ τις ἐξ ὑμῶν ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἁμαρτίας	1	Being stubborn is spoken of as being hard or having a hard heart. The hardness is a result of being deceived by sin. This can be reworded so that the abstract noun “deceitfulness” is expressed as the verb “deceive.” Alternate translation: “no one among you will be deceived by sin and become stubborn” or “you do not sin, deceiving yourselves so that you become stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:14	znu5				0	This continues the quotation from the same psalm that was also quoted in [Hebrews 3:7](../03/07.md).
-3:14	f52j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	γὰρ & γεγόναμεν	1	Here “we” refers to both the writer and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:14	f52j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	γὰρ & γεγόναμεν	1	Here “we” refers to both the writer and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:14	e753			ἐάνπερ & τῆς ὑποστάσεως & βεβαίαν κατάσχωμεν	1	“if we continue to confidently trust in him”
 3:14	j3aq			τὴν ἀρχὴν	1	“from when we first begin to believe in him”
 3:14	l9en		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism	μέχρι τέλους	1	This is a polite way of referring to when a person dies. Alternate translation: “until we die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
 3:15	bym1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	λέγεσθαι	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the writer wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:15	wa11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε	1	God’s “voice” represents him speaking. See how you translated this in [Hebrews 3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “when you hear God speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 3:15	j8dh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὡς ἐν τῷ παραπικρασμῷ	1	Here “rebellion” can be stated as a verb. See how you translated this in [Hebrews 3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “as when your ancestors rebelled against God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-3:16	b4jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “they” refers to the disobedient Israelites, and “we” refers to the author and readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:16	b4jy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “they” refers to the disobedient Israelites, and “we” refers to the author and readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:16	pwl2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίνες γὰρ ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν? ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντες οἱ ἐξελθόντες ἐξ Αἰγύπτου διὰ Μωϋσέως?	1	The author uses questions to teach his readers. These two questions can be joined as one statement, if needed. Alternate translation: “All those who came out of Egypt with Moses heard God, yet they still rebelled.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 3:17	swy4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τίσιν δὲ προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ?	1	The author uses questions to teach his readers. These two questions can be joined as one statement, if needed. Alternate translation: “For forty years, God was angry with those who sinned, and he let them die in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 3:17	aha2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη	1	“40 years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 7:14	qsk5			ἐξ Ἰούδα ἀνατέταλκεν ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν	1	The words “our Lord” refer to Jesus.
 7:14	ln94			ἐξ Ἰούδα	1	“from the tribe of Judah”
 7:15	i17g				0	This quote comes from a psalm of King David.
-7:15	jn1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	περισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν	1	“We can understand even more clearly.” Here “we” refers to the author and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+7:15	jn1p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	περισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν	1	“We can understand even more clearly.” Here “we” refers to the author and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 7:15	md9i			εἰ & ἀνίσταται ἱερεὺς ἕτερος	1	“if another priest comes”
 7:15	z1yl			κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ	1	This means that Christ as a priest has things in common with Melchizedek as a priest. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest”
 7:16	fr4a			ὃς οὐ κατὰ νόμον	1	“His becoming priest was not based on the law”
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 8:1	nb8q				0	The writer, having shown that Christ’s priesthood is better than the earthly priesthood, shows that the earthly priesthood was a pattern of heavenly things. Christ has a superior ministry, a superior covenant.
 8:1	tw7l			δὲ	1	This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
 8:1	z4dh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	λεγομένοις	1	Even though the author uses the plural pronoun “we,” he is most likely referring only to himself. Because the writer does not include his readers here, the word “we” is exclusive. Alternate translation: “I am saying” or “I am writing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
-8:1	m2b4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα	1	The author is including the readers here, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+8:1	m2b4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα	1	The author is including the readers here, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 8:1	b8qy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ θρόνου τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης	1	To sit at the “right hand of God” is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Hebrews 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “sat down at the place of honor and authority beside the throne of the Majesty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 8:2	lrb7			τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ Κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος	1	People built the earthly tabernacle out of animal skins fastened to a wooden framework, and they set it up in the manner of a tent. Here “true tabernacle” means the heavenly tabernacle that God created.
 8:3	su9j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πᾶς γὰρ ἀρχιερεὺς & καθίσταται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For God appoints every priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 10:29	el74		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης	1	Here “blood” stands for Christ’s death, by which God established the new covenant. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 10:29	wj2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τὸ αἷμα & ἐν ᾧ ἡγιάσθη	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the blood by which God sanctified him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 10:29	qr6c			τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος	1	“the Spirit of God, who provides grace”
-10:30	ynr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “we” here refers to the writer and all believers. These two quotations come from the law that Moses gave in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+10:30	ynr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” here refers to the writer and all believers. These two quotations come from the law that Moses gave in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 10:30	v8ad		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις	1	Vengeance is spoken of as if it were an object that belongs to God, who has the right to do as he wishes with what he owns. God has the right to take vengeance on his enemies. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 10:30	pdw9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω	1	God taking vengeance is spoken of as if he were paying back the harmful things that someone has done to others. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 10:31	hhu7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν εἰς χεῖρας	1	Receiving God’s full punishment is spoken of as if the person falls into God’s hands. Here “hands” refers to God’s power to judge. Alternate translation: “to receive God’s full punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 11:39	vgw2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	This expression stands for “what God had promised them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 11:40	p9uu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ χωρὶς ἡμῶν τελειωθῶσιν	1	This can be stated in positive and active form. Alternate translation: “in order that God would perfect us and them together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 12:intro	h1qb				0	# Hebrews 12 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nAfter telling of the value discipline, the author begins a series of exhortations. (See; [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/exhort]])\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:5-6, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Discipline\n\nGod wants his people to do what is right. When they do what is wrong, he needs to correct or punish them. He does this just as earthly fathers correct and punish children whom they love. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])
-12:1	jg6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The words “we” and “us” refer to the author and his readers. The word “you” is plural and here refers to the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+12:1	jg6w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The words “we” and “us” refer to the author and his readers. The word “you” is plural and here refers to the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 12:1	k8mr				0	Because of this great number of Old Testament believers, the author talks of the life of faith that believers should live with Jesus as their example.
 12:1	f6u9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς, τοσοῦτον ἔχοντες περικείμενον ἡμῖν νέφος μαρτύρων	1	The writer speaks about the Old Testament believers as if they were a cloud that surrounded the present-day believers. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “such a large cloud of witnesses surrounds us” or “there are so many examples of faithful people about whom we learn in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 12:1	hf97			μαρτύρων	1	Here “witnesses” refers to the Old Testament believers in chapter 11 who lived before the race of faith that believers now run.
@@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 12:24	kq1v			διαθήκης νέας μεσίτῃ	1	This means Jesus caused the new covenant between God and humans to exist. See how you translated this phrase in [Hebrews 9:15](../09/15.md).
 12:24	nz8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	αἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ, κρεῖττον λαλοῦντι παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ	1	The blood of Jesus and the blood of Abel are spoken of as if they were people calling out. Alternate translation: “the sprinkled blood of Jesus that says better things than the blood of Abel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 12:24	z7uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	αἵματι	1	Here “blood” stands for Jesus’ death, as Abel’s blood stands for his death. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-12:25	pnn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	This quotation is from the prophet Haggai in the Old Testament. The word “you” continues to refer to believers. The word “we” continues to refer to the writer and the readers who are believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+12:25	pnn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	This quotation is from the prophet Haggai in the Old Testament. The word “you” continues to refer to believers. The word “we” continues to refer to the writer and the readers who are believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 12:25	c9cn				0	Having contrasted the Israelites’ experience at Mount Sinai with the believers’ experience after Christ died, the writer reminds believers that they have the same God who warns them today. This is the fifth main warning given to believers.
 12:25	nnk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	μὴ παραιτήσησθε τὸν λαλοῦντα	1	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “you pay attention to the one who is speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 12:25	gkn1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	εἰ & ἐκεῖνοι οὐκ ἐξέφυγον	1	The implicit information can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the people of Israel did not escape judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ front:intro	xy4n				0	# Introduction to Hebrews\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 13:20	gn9w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν Ποιμένα τῶν προβάτων τὸν μέγαν	1	Christ in his role of leader and protector of those who believe in him is spoken of as if he were a shepherd of sheep. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 13:20	qxb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν αἵματι διαθήκης αἰωνίου	1	Here “blood” stands for the death of Jesus, which is the basis for the covenant that will last forever between God and all believers in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 13:21	qj79			καταρτίσαι ὑμᾶς ἐν παντὶ ἀγαθῷ, εἰς τὸ ποιῆσαι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	“give you every good thing you need in order to do his will “make you capable of doing every good thing according to his will”
-13:21	r3mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ποιῶν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	The word “us” refers to the author and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+13:21	r3mi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ποιῶν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	The word “us” refers to the author and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 13:21	u6iq			ᾧ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων	1	“whom all people will praise forever”
 13:22	wa9r			δὲ	1	This marks a new section of the letter. Here the author gives his final comments to his audience.
 13:22	b27j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	This refers to all the believers to whom he is writing whether male or female. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

tn_ISA.tsv

@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 1:9	cf1d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	Isaiah speaks to the people of Judah in the form of a poem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1:9	a3aq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo		0	This describes something that could have happened in the past but did not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 1:9	cy37				0	“a few survivors”
-1:9	qe2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here these words refer to Isaiah and includes all the people of Judah and Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:9	qe2a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here these words refer to Isaiah and includes all the people of Judah and Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:9	y4cq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	How Judah would have been like Sodom and Gomorrah can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “God would have destroyed us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1:10	p3g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	Isaiah speaks to the people of Judah in the form of a poem. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1:10	vtc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Isaiah is comparing the people of Judah to Sodom and Gomorrah to emphasize how sinful they have become. Alternate translation: “you rulers who are as sinful as the people of Sodom…you people who are as wicked as those who lived in Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 1:17	q1c7				0	“protect the women whose husbands have died”
 1:18	uns1				0	Yahweh continues to speak to the people of Judah.
 1:18	nj1x				0	Yahweh graciously and lovingly invites the people to listen to what he is about to say. “Please listen to me. Let” or “Pay attention; I want to help you. Let”
-1:18	j1pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	“let us think about this together” or “we need to discuss this” or “what are we going to do?” Yahweh invites the people to discuss the future. Here the word “us” refers to Yahweh and includes the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:18	j1pw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	“let us think about this together” or “we need to discuss this” or “what are we going to do?” Yahweh invites the people to discuss the future. Here the word “us” refers to Yahweh and includes the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:18	nf9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Isaiah is speaking of the people as if they were wearing clothes that were supposed to be white wool and of their sins as if they were red stains on the clothes. If Yahweh forgives their sins, it will be as if their clothes become white again. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:18	ep8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	Scarlet is a bright red color. Alternate translation: “bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 1:18	yt5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	White is often a symbol for holiness or purity. “Snow” refers to something like frozen rain that is very white. Since this simply describes something as very white, you could replace it with something else that is white: “white as a seashell” or “white as a dove.” This means that their sins will be forgiven. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 6:8	xf27				0	Isaiah continues to describe his vision.
 6:8	n956		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche		0	Here “voice” represents the Lord himself. Alternate translation: “the Lord say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 6:8	at9k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	It is implied that Yahweh will send someone to speak his message to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “Whom shall I send to be a messenger to my people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-6:8	ria2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	It seems “us” refers to Yahweh and the members of his heavenly council to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+6:8	ria2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	It seems “us” refers to Yahweh and the members of his heavenly council to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 6:9	vja4				0	“the people of Israel”
 6:9	iq3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative		0	Possible meanings are (1) the imperatives “do not understand” and “do not perceive” express what God is causing to happen. Alternate translation: “You will listen, but Yahweh will not let you understand; you will look carefully, but Yahweh will not allow you to understand” or (2) the imperatives “Listen” and “see” express the idea of “if.” Alternate translation: “Even if you listen you will not understand; even if you look carefully, you will not understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
 6:9	m1yh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis		0	You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “Listen to Yahweh’s message, but do not understand what it means; look at what Yahweh is doing, but do not realize what it means” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 9:5	klu8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you will burn the boots of the soldiers and their clothes, which are covered with blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 9:5	py1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	This can be made more explicit by translating it as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “burned. You will make the boots and the garments fuel for the fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 9:6	i19i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture		0	Isaiah continues to describe the time when God will save the people of Israel. Although these events will happen in the future ([Isaiah 9:1](./01.md)), Isaiah describes them as if they have already happened. This emphasizes that they certainly will happen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-9:6	h5x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The word “us” refers to both the speaker and the hearer and so is inclusive. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For the Lord will give to us a child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+9:6	h5x2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The word “us” refers to both the speaker and the hearer and so is inclusive. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For the Lord will give to us a child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 9:6	g3lc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	His authority to rule is spoken of as if it were the robe that is a symbol of his authority. Alternate translation: “he will wear his royal robe on his shoulder” or “he will have authority to rule as king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 9:6	r5cf				0	one who advises kings
 9:7	nq8j				0	“As time passes he will rule over more and more people and enable them to live more and more peacefully”
@@ -1367,7 +1367,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 24:15	l9zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	The phrase “in the east” represents the people living east of Israel. Isaiah is commanding these people as if they were there with him. But, he is talking to the people in the future after God devastates the earth. Alternate translation: “Therefore everyone from distant lands in the east will glorify Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 24:15	w2f4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	Isaiah is commanding the people who live on the islands in the Mediterranean sea as if they were there with him. But, he is talking to the people in the future after God devastates the earth. Alternate translation: “everyone in the islands will give glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 24:15	ip1j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	Here “name” represents Yahweh. Alternate translation: “to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-24:16	zwk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “we” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. Isaiah is describing something in the future as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: “we will hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
+24:16	zwk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. Isaiah is describing something in the future as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: “we will hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 24:16	zy21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	Isaiah repeats this phrase to emphasize his anguish. He was very concerned because he saw people who deceived others and did not do what they promised to do. Alternate translation: “I have become very weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 24:16	u7aa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	Isaiah repeats this phrase to emphasize his anguish. Alternate translation: “Indeed, those who deceive are now deceiving others” or “Indeed, the deceivers have acted deceitfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 24:17	ec2n				0	“You people of the earth will experience terror, the pit, and the snare”
@@ -1944,9 +1944,9 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 33:20	gq29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche		0	The people are referred to by their “eyes” to emphasize what they are seeing. Alternate translation: “you will see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 33:20	tj7h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	This speaks of Zion being secure and well establish as if it were secure tent. This can be stated in active form and written as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “it will be secure, like a tent that no one will ever remove” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 33:20	z75i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	This is part of the metaphor that compares Zion to a secure tent. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whose stakes no one will ever pull up and whose cords no one will ever break” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-33:21	js4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and includes the people of Judah. This speaks of the safety of living with Yahweh as if it were a place that has rivers around it so that enemies cannot attack it. Alternate translation: “Yahweh who is majestic will be with us, and we will be safe as if we were in a place surrounded by broad rivers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+33:21	js4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and includes the people of Judah. This speaks of the safety of living with Yahweh as if it were a place that has rivers around it so that enemies cannot attack it. Alternate translation: “Yahweh who is majestic will be with us, and we will be safe as if we were in a place surrounded by broad rivers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 33:21	z6si				0	“will travel the river”
-33:22	x9zc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	This refers to Isaiah and includes the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+33:22	x9zc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	This refers to Isaiah and includes the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 33:23	er96		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Possible meanings: (1) The Assyrian army is like a boat that is unable to move through the water: the ropes that support the mast and sail have come loose and no longer support the mast, so the sail is useless ([Isaiah 33:1](../33/01.md)) or (2) the people of Judah are no longer at war: “You have loosened the cords that supported your flagpole; the flag no longer flies” ([Isaiah 33:17](./17.md)-[Isaiah 22](./22.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 33:23	b3bn				0	tall poles that support the sail
 33:23	l3q9				0	a large cloth that fills with wind and moves a boat through the water
@@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 38:19	ye1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	Hezekiah repeats this phrase to emphasize that only a living person, not a dead person, can give thanks to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 38:20	nw4z				0	Hezekiah continues his written prayer.
 38:20	j3ts		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	This refers to him being saved from dying. It can be made more explicit. Alternate translation: “save me from dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-38:20	k672		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “we” refers to Hezekiah and the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+38:20	k672		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to Hezekiah and the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 38:21	b3bq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background		0	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. This gives background information about Isaiah and Hezekiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 38:21	x8d3				0	“Let Hezekiah’s servants”
 38:21	drf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	This was used as an ointment. The meaning of this can be made clear. Alternate translation: “use an ointment of mashed figs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2476,7 +2476,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 42:23	gp1t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here “you” is plural and refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 42:24	p2dz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		0	These two phrases mean the same thing. Isaiah uses this as a leading question in order to emphasize the answer that he will give in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who gave the people of Israel over to robbers and looters.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 42:24	q9du		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion		0	Isaiah uses this rhetorical question to emphasize that Yahweh alone was responsible for Israel’s situation, and to explain the reason that Yahweh did it. Alternate translation: “It was certainly Yahweh…refused to obey.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-42:24	e8z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to the people of Israel and to Isaiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+42:24	e8z2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here the word “we” refers to the people of Israel and to Isaiah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 42:24	dla2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	The word “they” also refers to the people of Israel and to Isaiah. The two phrases mean the same thing. In the first, obeying Yahweh’s laws is spoken of as if it were walking in the paths in which Yahweh commanded them to walk. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 42:25	al3a				0	Isaiah continues speaking.
 42:25	r4nh				0	“Therefore Yahweh”
@@ -2713,7 +2713,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 47:3	nic9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Yahweh continues to speak to Babylon about her downfall as if she were a queen who is humiliated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 47:3	jf7c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You will be naked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 47:3	g35e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism		0	Here the word “shame” is a euphemism for one’s private parts. This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “people will see your shame” or “people will see your private parts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-47:4	w7a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	“Our” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. See how you translated “Redeemer” in [Isaiah 41:14](../41/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+47:4	w7a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	“Our” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. See how you translated “Redeemer” in [Isaiah 41:14](../41/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 47:4	l2cn				0	See how you translated this phrase in [Isaiah 1:24](../01/24.md).
 47:4	eul3				0	See how you translated this phrase in [Isaiah 5:16](../05/16.md).
 47:5	m7ax				0	This phrase refers to the city, Babylon, which is spoken of as if it were a daughter. That the city is a “daughter” indicates how the Chaldeans think fondly of her. See how you translated this phrase in [Isaiah 47:1](../47/01.md).
@@ -3055,7 +3055,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 52:15	r1l5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that which no one had told them” or “something no one had told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 53:intro	znn5				0	# Isaiah 53 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in this chapter.\n\nIn this chapter there is an important teaching or prophecy about the Messiah and his life and ministry. It begins in 52:13 and scholars usually note that it portrays the Messiah as a “suffering servant.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Atonement\nThis chapter prophesies about the death of Christ for sin. Most scholars believe it teaches that Christ was a righteous man who died for the sins of mankind. This is usually referred to as the atonement. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])
 53:1	l33i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture		0	Isaiah continues describing Yahweh’s servant. Here Isaiah describes events that will happen in the future as if they happened in the past. This emphasizes that they certainly will happen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-53:1	yul6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	What Isaiah just found out is so amazing that he wonders if the exiles will believe it. The “we” includes him and those in exile. Alternate translation: “It is hard for anyone to believe what we have heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+53:1	yul6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	What Isaiah just found out is so amazing that he wonders if the exiles will believe it. The “we” includes him and those in exile. Alternate translation: “It is hard for anyone to believe what we have heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 53:1	vlz4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	Arm refers to God’s power. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Yahweh has revealed his power to people.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 53:2	v5vm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	Here “he” refers to God’s servant whom Isaiah compares to a very young tree. This emphasizes that he will appear weak. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 53:2	a2he		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	“parched earth” is hard and dry ground that will not allow plants to grow and represents where the servant of Yahweh will come. Alternate translation: “out of an impossible situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3303,13 +3303,13 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 59:8	i53h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	“paths” represents their way of life. Alternate translation: “they never do what is just” or “everything they do is unjust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 59:8	lc94		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	“Crooked paths” represents the way of life that is corrupt. Alternate translation: “They say and do dishonest things. They are devious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 59:9	yen4				0	Isaiah continues speaking to the people of Israel.
-59:9	ps1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. “Far” represents that justice is gone and difficult to get. Alternate translation: “justice is gone and very difficult to get” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+59:9	ps1q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. “Far” represents that justice is gone and difficult to get. Alternate translation: “justice is gone and very difficult to get” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 59:9	ir1h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	Each of these phrases means that the people are waiting for God’s goodness, but it seems like he has abandoned them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 59:10	bg1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	This means that because God is not coming to them, they feel helpless, not finding the right path and despairing of the future, with no hope for a vibrant life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 59:11	wv6x				0	Isaiah continues speaking to the people of Israel.
 59:11	jgk8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	These refer to the sounds the people made because they were distressed and mourning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 59:12	ihk9				0	Isaiah continues speaking.
-59:12	c6ut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “our” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+59:12	c6ut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “our” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 59:12	dxj1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here “you” refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 59:12	ujp4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification		0	Isaiah describes the sins as a person who goes before God to declare that the people are guilty. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 59:12	w614		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	“With us” represents being aware of them. Alternate translation: “for we are aware of our transgressions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3456,7 +3456,7 @@ front:intro	l9fr				0	# Introduction to Isaiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 63:6	v3ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Here “blood” represents the life of Yahweh’s enemies that was gushing out so they would die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 63:7	e55q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns		0	The abstract noun “faithfulness” can be stated as “faithfully” or “faithful.” See how you translated “covenant faithfulness” in [Isaiah 16:5](../16/05.md). Alternate translation: “I will tell about how God has acted faithfully to his covenant” or “I will tell about all the faithful things God has done for his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 63:7	d6e5				0	Here “I” refers to Isaiah.
-63:7	x88u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+63:7	x88u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Isaiah and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 63:9	gd1d				0	“Through all our suffering.” Here “their” refers to the people of Israel. Isaiah included himself as a member of the people.
 63:9	xq2j				0	Here “he” refers to Yahweh.
 63:9	zj13				0	This is a representative who is sent from God’s presence.

tn_JAS.tsv

@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ front:intro	exs3				0	# Introduction to James\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n
 2:1	ici9				0	James continues to tell the scattered Jewish believers how to live by loving one another and reminds them not to favor rich people over poor brothers.
 2:1	kab4			ἀδελφοί μου	1	James considers his audience to be Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters in Christ”
 2:1	qs2x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἔχετε τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Believing in Jesus Christ is spoken of as if it were an object that one could hold onto. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2:1	x32n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The word “our” includes James and his fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:1	x32n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	The word “our” includes James and his fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:1	en1c			προσωπολημψίαις	1	the desire to help some people more than others
 2:2	h5uh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἐὰν & ἀνὴρ	1	James starts to describe a situation where the believers might give more honor to a rich person than to a poor person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
 2:2	j8d5			χρυσοδακτύλιος, ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ	1	“dressed like a wealthy person”
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ front:intro	exs3				0	# Introduction to James\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n
 3:1	c36b			ἀδελφοί μου	1	“my fellow believers”
 3:1	aw5f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μεῖζον κρίμα λημψόμεθα.	1	This passage speaks of stricter judgment that will come from God on those who teach others about him. Alternate translation: “God will judge us who teach more severely because we know his word better than some people whom we have taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 3:1	v7fa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		1	James includes himself and other teachers, but not the readers, so the word “we” is exclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-3:2	ab9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	πταίομεν ἅπαντες	1	James speaks of himself, other teachers, and the readers, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:2	ab9h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πταίομεν ἅπαντες	1	James speaks of himself, other teachers, and the readers, so the word “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:2	p9ek		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	πταίομεν	1	Sinning is spoken of as if it were stumbling while walking. Alternate translation: “fail” or “sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:2	t6xt			ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει	1	“does not sin by saying wrong things”
 3:2	kn4v			οὗτος τέλειος ἀνήρ	1	“he is spiritually mature”

tn_JHN.tsv

@@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ front:intro	t6za				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of John\n## Part 1: General I
 9:1	un4h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	καὶ	1	This word shows that the author is about to describe a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 9:1	z5sx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	παράγων	1	Here “Jesus” is a synecdoche for Jesus and the disciples. Alternate translation: “as Jesus and his disciples passed by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 9:2	w44c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τίς ἥμαρτεν, οὗτος ἢ οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ	1	This question reflects the ancient Jewish belief that sin caused all illnesses and other deformities. The rabbis also taught that it was possible for a baby to sin while still in the womb. Alternate translation: “Teacher, we know that sin causes a person to be blind. Whose sin caused this man to be born blind? did this man himself sin, or was it his parents who sinned?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-9:4	h231		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This “We” includes both Jesus and the disciples he is talking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+9:4	h231		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This “We” includes both Jesus and the disciples he is talking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 9:4	g92d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡμέρα & νὺξ	1	Here “day” and “night” are metaphors. Jesus is comparing the time when people can do God’s work to daytime, the time when people normally work, and nighttime to when they cannot do God’s work. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 9:5	f2xu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1	Here the “world” is a metonym for the people who live in the world. Alternate translation: “living among the people of this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 9:5	dd8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	φῶς & τοῦ κόσμου	1	Here “light” is a metaphor for the true revelation of God. Alternate translation: “the one who shows what is true just as light allows people to see what is in the darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

tn_JOB.tsv

@@ -1982,7 +1982,7 @@ front:intro	u3jc				0	# Introduction to Job\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n
 34:2	zux7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony		0	Elihu is criticizing Job and his friends. He does not think they are actually wise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 34:3	ln8s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	Elihu means people listen carefully to determine what is right or wrong just like we taste food to determine if it is good or bad. Here people are referred to by their “ear” and their “palate” to emphasize that they are tasting and hearing. Alternate translation: “For we listen to words to know what is good and bad, just as we taste foods to know what is good to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 34:4	kw1y				0	Elihu continues speaking.
-34:4	v6hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Elihu, Job, and his three friends. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+34:4	v6hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “us” refers to Elihu, Job, and his three friends. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 34:5	k2e1				0	“refused to give me justice”
 34:6	k523		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God considers me to be a liar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 34:6	i95p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	Here Job’s sickness and suffering is spoken of as if it were a “wound.” Alternate translation: “I am sick and no one can heal me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

tn_JON.tsv

@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ front:intro	hk4p				0	# Introduction to Jonah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 3:10	k8am		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	שָׁ֖בוּ מִ⁠דַּרְכָּ֣⁠ם הָ⁠רָעָ֑ה	1	Here the author speaks of the people stopping their sinning as if they turned around from walking on a path toward evil and started walking in the opposite direction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:10	ab85			וַ⁠יִּנָּ֣חֶם הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֗ים עַל־הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה	1	The word translated as “evil” here is very broad, including moral evil, physical evil, and everything that is bad. It is the same word used in the previous sentence (and verse 8) to describe the actions of the Ninevites. The author is showing that when people repent of moral evil, God relents of doing physical evil (punishment). God never does moral evil. If this is clear in your language, you may want to use the same word in both sentences. If that is not clear, you may want to use different words.
 3:10	it1a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠לֹ֥א עָשָֽׂה	1	What God did not do can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and he did not punish them” or “and he did not destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-4:intro	ys57				0	# Jonah 04 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nJonah continues the narrative while bringing the book to what seems like an unusual end. This emphasizes that the book is not really about Jonah. It is about God’s desire to be merciful to everyone, whether Jew or pagan. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Prophecy not coming true\n\nIt is important to see the relationship between a prophet and Yahweh. A prophet was to prophesy for Yahweh, and his words must come true. According to the law of Moses, if that did not happen, the penalty was death, because that shows that he was not a real prophet. But when Jonah told the city of Nineveh that it was going to be destroyed in forty days, it did not happen at that time. This is because God reserves the right to be merciful. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Jonah’s anger\n\n\n\nWhen God did not destroy Nineveh, Jonah was angry with God because Jonah hated the people of Nineveh. They were enemies of Israel. But God wanted Jonah, and the readers of this book, to learn that God loves all people.\n\n### Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nAs in other places, Jonah asks rhetorical questions to show how angry he was at Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Parallel to Mount Sinai\n\nIn verse 2, Jonah attributes a series of characteristics to God. A Jewish reader of this book would recognize this as a formula Moses used in speaking about God when he was meeting God on Mount Sinai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### God’s grace\n\nWhen Jonah went outside the city, he got very hot and God graciously provided some relief through the plant. God was trying to teach Jonah through an object lesson. It is important for the reader to see this clearly. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])
+4:intro	ys57				0	# Jonah 04 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nJonah continues the narrative while bringing the book to what seems like an unusual end. This emphasizes that the book is not really about Jonah. It is about God’s desire to be merciful to everyone, whether Jew or pagan. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Prophecy not coming true\n\nIt is important to see the relationship between a prophet and Yahweh. A prophet was to prophesy for Yahweh, and his words must come true. According to the law of Moses, if that did not happen, the penalty was death, because that shows that he was not a real prophet. But when Jonah told the city of Nineveh that it was going to be destroyed in forty days, it did not happen at that time. This is because God reserves the right to be merciful. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Jonah’s anger\n\nWhen God did not destroy Nineveh, Jonah was angry with God because Jonah hated the people of Nineveh. They were enemies of Israel. But God wanted Jonah, and the readers of this book, to learn that God loves all people.\n\n### Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nAs in other places, Jonah asks rhetorical questions to show how angry he was at Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Parallel to Mount Sinai\n\nIn verse 2, Jonah attributes a series of characteristics to God. A Jewish reader of this book would recognize this as a formula Moses used in speaking about God when he was meeting God on Mount Sinai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### God’s grace\n\nWhen Jonah went outside the city, he got very hot and God graciously provided some relief through the plant. God was trying to teach Jonah through an object lesson. It is important for the reader to see this clearly. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])
 4:1	jdr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יֵּ֥רַע אֶל־יוֹנָ֖ה רָעָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֑ה וַ⁠יִּ֖חַר לֽ⁠וֹ׃	1	This sentence introduces the next part of the story where Jonah responds to God saving the city of Nineveh. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 4:1	abc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יִּ֖חַר לֽ⁠וֹ	1	This is an idiom that speaks of Jonah’s anger as if it were a fire burning inside him. Alternate translation: “and he was very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 4:2	q6bb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אָנָּ֤ה	1	In this context, the word **Ah!** shows intense frustration. Represent this emotion in the most natural way for your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])

tn_JUD.tsv

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ front:intro	xh5n				0	# Introduction to Jude\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\
 1:1	npc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἰούδας, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος	1	Jude is the brother of James. Alternate translation: “I am Jude, a servant of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1:1	m3v1			ἀδελφὸς & Ἰακώβου	1	James and Jude were half brothers of Jesus.
 1:2	r5ae		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἔλεος ὑμῖν, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ ἀγάπη πληθυνθείη	1	“may mercy, peace, and love be increased many times for you.” These ideas are spoken of as if they were objects that could grow in size or number. This can be restate to remove the abstract nouns “mercy,” “peace,” and “love.” Alternate translation: “May God continue to be merciful to you so that you live peacefully and love one another more and more (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:3	kjk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “our” in this letter includes both Jude and believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	kjk6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “our” in this letter includes both Jude and believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	yfa8				0	Jude tells the believers his reason for writing this letter.
 1:3	mi3w			τῆς κοινῆς ἡμῶν σωτηρίας	1	“the salvation we share”
 1:3	si1u			ἀνάγκην ἔσχον γράψαι	1	“I felt a great need to write” or “I felt an urgent need to write”

tn_MAT.tsv

@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ front:intro	sa9c				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n## Part 1: Genera
 3:13	vl93				0	Here the scene shifts to a later time when John the Baptist baptizes Jesus.
 3:13	zbj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so John could baptize him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:14	cl7t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἐγὼ χρείαν ἔχω ὑπὸ σοῦ βαπτισθῆναι, καὶ σὺ ἔρχῃ πρός με?	1	John uses a question to show his surprise at Jesus’ request. Alternate translation: “You are more important than I am. I should not baptize you. You should baptize me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-3:15	h6ca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here “us” refers to Jesus and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:15	h6ca		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1	Here “us” refers to Jesus and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:16	n8bk				0	This is the end of the part of the story about John the Baptist. It describes what happened after he baptized Jesus.
 3:16	inf6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς δὲ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “After John baptized Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:16	sf5w			ἰδοὺ	1	The word “behold” here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ front:intro	sa9c				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n## Part 1: Genera
 8:24	x7k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς μέγας ἐγένετο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “a powerful storm arose on the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 8:24	m6w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὥστε τὸ πλοῖον καλύπτεσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so that the waves covered the boat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 8:25	k2hd			ἤγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, Κύριε, σῶσον	1	Possible meanings are (1) they first woke Jesus and then they said, “Save us” or (2) as they were waking Jesus up, they were saying “Save us.”
-8:25	b2wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	σῶσον & ἀπολλύμεθα	1	If you need to translate these words as inclusive or exclusive, then inclusive is best. The disciples probably meant they wanted Jesus to save the disciples and himself from drowning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+8:25	b2wh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	σῶσον & ἀπολλύμεθα	1	If you need to translate these words as inclusive or exclusive, then inclusive is best. The disciples probably meant they wanted Jesus to save the disciples and himself from drowning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 8:25	xf5d			ἀπολλύμεθα	1	“we are going to die”
 8:26	jmt8			αὐτοῖς	1	“to the disciples”
 8:26	g8p7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί δειλοί ἐστε, ὀλιγόπιστοι	1	Jesus was rebuking the disciples with this rhetorical question. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid…faith!” or “There is nothing for you to be afraid of…faith!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -1722,7 +1722,7 @@ front:intro	sa9c				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n## Part 1: Genera
 17:3	n63y			αὐτοῖς	1	This refers to Peter, James, and John.
 17:3	sde3			μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	“with Jesus”
 17:4	r41c			ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν	1	“said.” Peter is not responding to a question.
-17:4	d231		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	It is not clear whether “us” refers only to Peter, James, and John, or if it refers to everyone there, including Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. If you can translate so that both options are possible, do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+17:4	d231		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	It is not clear whether “us” refers only to Peter, James, and John, or if it refers to everyone there, including Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. If you can translate so that both options are possible, do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 17:5	cek4			ἰδοὺ	1	This alerts the reader to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
 17:5	an8j			ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς	1	“came over them”
 17:5	kc8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης	1	Here “voice” refers to God speaking. Alternate translation: “God spoke to them from out of the cloud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1973,7 +1973,7 @@ front:intro	sa9c				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n## Part 1: Genera
 20:17	iu9d				0	Jesus foretells his death and resurrection a third time as he and his disciples travel to Jerusalem.
 20:17	b6ia			ἀναβαίνων ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα	1	Jerusalem was on top of a hill, so people had to travel up to get there.
 20:18	d3ig			ἰδοὺ, ἀναβαίνομεν	1	Jesus uses the word “See” to tell the disciples the must pay attention to what he is about to tell them.
-20:18	nf34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1	Here “we” refers to Jesus and the disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+20:18	nf34		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀναβαίνομεν	1	Here “we” refers to Jesus and the disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 20:18	b2f2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 20:18	rbl4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου & αὐτὸν	1	Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If necessary, you can translate these in the first person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 20:18	s8uh			κατακρινοῦσιν	1	The chief priests and scribes will condemn Jesus.

tn_MRK.tsv

@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ front:intro	r2f2				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n## Part 1: General I
 4:38	qy5l			τῇ πρύμνῃ	1	This is at the very back of the boat. “the stern of the boat”
 4:38	xdm6			ἐγείρουσιν αὐτὸν	1	The word “they” refers to the disciples. Compare a similar idea in the next verse, verse 39, “He got up.” “He” refers to Jesus.
 4:38	b4xb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα?	1	The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-4:38	qtb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἀπολλύμεθα	1	The word “we” includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:38	qtb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἀπολλύμεθα	1	The word “we” includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:39	yym6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σιώπα, πεφίμωσο	1	These two phrases are similar and used to emphasize what Jesus wanted the wind and the sea to do. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 4:39	ag41			γαλήνη μεγάλη	1	“a great stillness over the sea” or “a great calm over the sea”
 4:40	h7n3			καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς	1	“And Jesus said to his disciples”
@@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ front:intro	r2f2				0	# Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n## Part 1: General I
 9:4	f2d6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὤφθη & Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ	1	It may be helpful to state who these men are. Alternate translation: “two prophets who had lived long ago, Elijah and Moses, appeared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 9:4	pj3i			ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες	1	The word “they” refers to Elijah and Moses.
 9:5	w6vs			ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	“Peter said to Jesus.” Here the word “answered” is used to introduce Peter into the conversation. Peter was not answering a question.
-9:5	iqc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	It is not clear whether “us” refers only to Peter, James, and John, or if it refers to everyone there, including Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. If you can translate so that both options are possible, do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+9:5	iqc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι	1	It is not clear whether “us” refers only to Peter, James, and John, or if it refers to everyone there, including Jesus, Elijah, and Moses. If you can translate so that both options are possible, do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 9:5	k3y1			σκηνάς	1	simple, temporary places in which to sit or sleep
 9:6	r3bn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο	1	This parenthetical sentence tells background information about Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 9:6	f8hn			ἔκφοβοι & ἐγένοντο	1	“they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”

tn_NEH.tsv

@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 1:11	r7af		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	Here, **face** is a figurative way of referring to the action of seeing, and seeing is a figurative way of describing knowledge, perception, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, Nehemiah is asking God to cause the king to make a favorable decision in response to a request he plans to make. Alternate translation: “Please grant that the king will agree to the request that I am going to make.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:11	a21b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה	1	As we will discover in the next chapter, **this man** refers to Artaxerxes, the king of Persia. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1:11	h9hl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וַ⁠אֲנִ֛י הָיִ֥יתִי מַשְׁקֶ֖ה לַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ	1	This is background information about Nehemiah’s role in the king’s court. Your language may have a special way to mark background information. As a “cupbearer,” it was Nehemiah’s duty to serve the wine at the king’s table, but he was much more than a waiter or butler. When the king gave him this assignment, this showed that he trusted Nehemiah completely to protect him from being poisoned. Nehemiah’s work also allowed him to see the king frequently and get to know him. So this was an important office. Alternate translation: “At that time, I was an important official who served the wine at the king’s table.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-2:intro	mj1d				0	# Nehemiah 02 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins the account of the construction of the wall. Many scholars believe these chapters teach valuable lessons on leadership ([Nehemiah 2-6](./01.md)).\n\n### Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Nehemiah’s character\nApparently, Nehemiah’s character made an impression on the king. It was very unusual for a king to be so concerned with one of his servants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Cultural Customs\nIn ancient Persia, people thought it was important for their conquered peoples to retain and practice their own cultural customs. It was thought that this independence promoted peace in their vast kingdom. The rebuilding of Jerusalem may have been seen as a way to allow for the Jewish cultural practices.\n\n### Yahweh’s control\nYahweh is seen as very powerful. He is able to provide for his people even through a foreign king. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])
+2:intro	mj1d				0	# Nehemiah 02 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins the account of the construction of the wall. Many scholars believe these chapters teach valuable lessons on leadership ([Nehemiah 2-6](./01.md)).\n\n### Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Nehemiah’s character\nApparently, Nehemiah’s character made an impression on the king. It was very unusual for a king to be so concerned with one of his servants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Cultural Customs\nIn ancient Persia, people thought it was important for their conquered peoples to retain and practice their own cultural customs. It was thought that this independence promoted peace in their vast kingdom. The rebuilding of Jerusalem may have been seen as a way to allow for the Jewish cultural practices.\n\n### Yahweh’s control\nYahweh is seen as very powerful. He is able to provide for his people even through a foreign king. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])
 2:1	a23b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. Alternate translation: “Then one day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 2:1	a25b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בְּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן שְׁנַ֥ת עֶשְׂרִ֛ים לְ⁠אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ	1	Since there were twelve months in the Hebrew calendar, and it was still the same year in the reign of Artaxerxes, this means that four months had gone by since Hanani came and spoke with Nehemiah. The implication is that Nehemiah had been praying all this time in the way described in chapter 1. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I prayed like this for four months” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2:1	h3hu		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	בְּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֗ן	1	**Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 2:20	iv9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נָק֣וּם וּ⁠בָנִ֑ינוּ	1	As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** means to begin something. Alternate translation: “going to begin rebuilding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 2:20	a4e6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּ⁠צְדָקָ֛ה וְ⁠זִכָּר֖וֹן בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1	The terms **share**, **right**, and **memorial** all mean something similar. Nehemiah uses them together for emphasis. The meanings are not entirely certain. “Share” may suggest that the Samaritans are not part of the community. “Right” may mean that they have no legal basis to say what should happen in Jerusalem. “Memorial” could mean that they had have no role in the city’s history, or that there is no record of their Israelite ancestry. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (Note: A doublet can involve the use of more than two terms.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 2:20	a35c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶ֗ם אֵֽין־חֵ֧לֶק וּ⁠צְדָקָ֛ה וְ⁠זִכָּר֖וֹן בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם	1	Depending on their meaning, the terms “share,” “right,” and “memorial” may be abstract nouns. If so, you could translate the idea behind them with a phrase that expresses their overall meaning. Alternate translation: “But you have absolutely nothing to do with what happens in Jerusalem.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-3:intro	dfw6				0	# Nehemiah 03 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Priests\nThe priests worked on rebuilding the city. Normally, the priests were exempt from this type of work. Because they helped, it emphasizes that this is a holy work and something done for Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Cooperation\nEveryone worked on this project. Many names are mentioned to emphasize the cooperation between the different families. Each was given a section of the wall to rebuild.
+3:intro	dfw6				0	# Nehemiah 03 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Priests\nThe priests worked on rebuilding the city. Normally, the priests were exempt from this type of work. Because they helped, it emphasizes that this is a holy work and something done for Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Cooperation\nEveryone worked on this project. Many names are mentioned to emphasize the cooperation between the different families. Each was given a section of the wall to rebuild.
 3:1	ald8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יָּ֡קָם אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֨ן הַ⁠גָּד֜וֹל	1	This chapter records the names of the people who repaired the wall of Jerusalem, and it describes what parts of the wall they worked on. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly at the start of the chapter. (In this book Nehemiah records everything he did to help the people of Judah, and he prays that God will remember him and bless him for what he did. We see in this chapter that he also wants God to remember and bless everyone else who helped.) Alternate translation: “These are the names of the people who helped to rebuild the wall around Jerusalem. Now Eliashib the high priest rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 3:1	a37c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַ⁠יָּ֡קָם	1	As in [2:18](../02/18.md), **rise up** here means to begin something. Alternate translation: “began to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 3:1	g9az		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֩	1	This is the name of a man. It occurs about a dozen times in the book of Nehemiah. It will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 3:32	x1tq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בֵ֨ין עֲלִיַּ֤ת הַ⁠פִּנָּה֙ לְ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠צֹּ֔אן הֶחֱזִ֥יקוּ	1	This brings the description of the repairs back around to where they started. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly by saying “the last section.” Alternate translation: “repaired the last section of the wall, from the corner apartments to the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 3:32	p1kr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ⁠צֹּרְפִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רֹכְלִֽים	1	This does not mean all the goldsmiths and all the merchants. Nehemiah is once again using the names of whole groups to refer to parts of them. Alternate translation: “some of the other goldsmiths, along with some traders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 3:32	a69c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לְ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠צֹּ֔אן	1	This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the Sheep Gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-4:intro	tlj9				0	# Nehemiah 04 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Dedication\nThe people were so dedicated to rebuilding the walls that they worked with their weapons ready for battle right next to them. Even when they were threatened with an attack, they continued to trust in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nSanballat uses a series of rhetorical questions. These are intended to show his intense anger against the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+4:intro	tlj9				0	# Nehemiah 04 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Dedication\nThe people were so dedicated to rebuilding the walls that they worked with their weapons ready for battle right next to them. Even when they were threatened with an attack, they continued to trust in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nSanballat uses a series of rhetorical questions. These are intended to show his intense anger against the Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 4:1	rnw3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֞י	1	Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 4:1	vfu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	סַנְבַלַּ֗ט	1	This is a man’s name. See how you translated this in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 4:1	a71c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וַ⁠יִּ֣חַר ל֔⁠וֹ וַ⁠יִּכְעַ֖ס הַרְבֵּ֑ה	1	These two phrases mean similar things. Nehemiah uses the repetition to emphasize how angry Sanballat was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “he became furiously angry” or “he became very angry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 4:23	flyg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וְ⁠אַנְשֵׁ֤י הַ⁠מִּשְׁמָר֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אַחֲרַ֔⁠י	1	This likely refers to the personal bodyguard that the king would have assigned to Nehemiah when he appointed him to be the governor of Judah. (Nehemiah describes this appointment in [5:14](../05/14.md).) Alternate translation: “my personal bodyguard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 4:23	upc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	אִ֖ישׁ שִׁלְח֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מָּֽיִם	1	Here the specific meaning of the Hebrew text is unknown, but Nehemiah is almost certainly leaving out some of the words that a sentence would normally have to have in order to be complete. He says that he and his relatives, servants, and bodyguards did not take off their clothes, **or anyone his weapon at the water.** This could mean that “no one took his weapon off even when he was washing himself” or that “no one took his weapon off even when going to get water.” If it would be clearer in your language if you explained what “at the water” might mean, you could choose one of these possibilities. Alternate translation: “Each of us always had our weapons with us, even when we were washing ourselves.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 4:23	v2e1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	פֹשְׁטִ֖ים בְּגָדֵ֑י⁠נוּ אִ֖ישׁ שִׁלְח֥⁠וֹ	1	In this context, **a man** means **anyone.** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-5:intro	k7pb				0	# Nehemiah 05 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Equality\n\nThe rich made money from the poor. The rich oppressed the poor by charging interest on loans. Because Nehemiah wanted to treat everyone fairly, he did not collect any taxes from them. This chapter also emphasizes that it was wrong to enslave a fellow Jew. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/oppress]])\n\n### Governor\nNehemiah was a governmental leader in Jerusalem, but he was not a king. Jerusalem had a great deal of independence, but it was under the authority of the Persian king. The term “governor” reflects this idea, but a different term may be used in translation.
+5:intro	k7pb				0	# Nehemiah 05 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Equality\n\nThe rich made money from the poor. The rich oppressed the poor by charging interest on loans. Because Nehemiah wanted to treat everyone fairly, he did not collect any taxes from them. This chapter also emphasizes that it was wrong to enslave a fellow Jew. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/oppress]])\n\n### Governor\nNehemiah was a governmental leader in Jerusalem, but he was not a king. Jerusalem had a great deal of independence, but it was under the authority of the Persian king. The term “governor” reflects this idea, but a different term may be used in translation.
 5:1	za4u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	וַ⁠תְּהִ֨י	1	Nehemiah now relates something else that was happening even while the Jews were trying to rebuild the wall and defend themselves against their enemies. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Around this same time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 5:1	zmb8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	צַעֲקַ֥ת הָ⁠עָ֛ם וּ⁠נְשֵׁי⁠הֶ֖ם גְּדוֹלָ֑ה	1	**Outcry** is an abstract noun that refers to the complaints that the poorer Jews made to Nehemiah about how the wealthier and more powerful Jews were treating them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “complain.” Since Nehemiah says this was a “great” outcry, involving many serious grievances, you could intensify the verb with an adverb such as “bitterly.” Alternate translation: “many of the men and their wives complained bitterly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 5:1	czx5			הָ⁠עָ֛ם וּ⁠נְשֵׁי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	Here, **the people** seems to indicate certain men who lived in Jerusalem, since Nehemiah also mentions their wives. Alternate translation: “many of the men and their wives”
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 5:19	b1i9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י & לְ⁠טוֹבָ֑ה	1	To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 5:19	b1j1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָ֑ה	1	In this context, **remember** means to think about someone and consider what action you can take on their behalf. Nehemiah is not suggesting that God has forgotten him. Alternate translation: “think of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 5:19	b1j3			כֹּ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֖יתִי עַל־הָ⁠עָ֥ם הַ⁠זֶּֽה	1	Nehemiah is once again leaving out some words that a sentence would ordinarily need. He is asking God to do good things for him because of all the good things he has done for the people of Judah as their governor. Alternate translation: “reward me because of all the good that I have done for the people of Judah”
-6:intro	k4df				0	# Nehemiah 06 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe building of the wall is completed in this chapter.\n\nThe ULT sets the lines in 6:6-7 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are part of a long quotation.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Miracle\n\nCompleting this city wall in only 52 days was considered proof that God had helped the Jews, especially given the opposition that they had experienced from the people in surrounding areas.
+6:intro	k4df				0	# Nehemiah 06 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe building of the wall is completed in this chapter.\n\nThe ULT sets the lines in 6:6-7 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are part of a long quotation.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Miracle\n\nCompleting this city wall in only 52 days was considered proof that God had helped the Jews, especially given the opposition that they had experienced from the people in surrounding areas.
 6:1	c1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֣י	1	Nehemiah uses this phrase to introduce the next event in his story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 6:1	c1a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	נִשְׁמַ֣ע	1	This means that these enemies learned somehow that the wall was finished. Perhaps someone came and told them, or perhaps they received a written report. Nehemiah figuratively uses hearing, one means of discovering things, to describe these men learning this. Alternate translation: “when our enemies learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 6:1	c1a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר נִשְׁמַ֣ע & וּ⁠לְ⁠יֶ֣תֶר אֹֽיְבֵ֗י⁠נוּ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when our enemies learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 6:19	mj72		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	טוֹבֹתָ֗י⁠ו הָי֤וּ אֹמְרִים֙ לְ⁠פָנַ֔⁠י	1	Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “told me personally about Tobiah’s good deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 6:19	c1n3			הָי֤וּ	1	**They** means the people who were loyal to Tobiah.
 6:19	e3zt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠דְבָרַ֕⁠י הָי֥וּ מוֹצִיאִ֖ים ל֑⁠וֹ	1	**Taking out** here is an idiom that means these people were “reporting” Nehemiah’s responses to Tobiah. Alternate translation: “and then told him about my responses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-7:intro	qk4v				0	# Nehemiah 07 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Genealogy\n\nThe people who returned from Persia were counted according to their families. Nehemiah ensured that those who lived in Jerusalem had a completely Jewish ancestry.\n\n### Different lists\nThis list is paralleled in [Ezra 2](../../ezr/02/01.md). The lists do contain some differences in numbers. This is probably due to the timing of their counting. They were likely counted at different times.
+7:intro	qk4v				0	# Nehemiah 07 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Genealogy\n\nThe people who returned from Persia were counted according to their families. Nehemiah ensured that those who lived in Jerusalem had a completely Jewish ancestry.\n\n### Different lists\nThis list is paralleled in [Ezra 2](../../ezr/02/01.md). The lists do contain some differences in numbers. This is probably due to the timing of their counting. They were likely counted at different times.
 7:1	d1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וַ⁠יְהִ֗י	1	This expression introduces a new event in the story. You do not need to represent it in your translation unless your language has a similar expression that it characteristically uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 7:1	g3zz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר נִבְנְתָה֙ הַ⁠חוֹמָ֔ה	1	You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when we had finished the wall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 7:1	fk6l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וָ⁠אַעֲמִ֖יד הַ⁠דְּלָת֑וֹת	1	As in [4:14](../04/14.md) and [6:1,](../06/01.md), Nehemiah is using himself to represent the entire community that he is a part of. Alternate translation: “and we had put the doors in the gates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 7:73	e7np		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֡ם וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִים֩ וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֨ים וּ⁠מִן־הָ⁠עָ֧ם וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֛ים וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל	1	Five of the groups in this list are also named in the document about the people who returned from exile: the priests (verses 39–43), the Levites (verse 43), the gatekeepers (verse 45), the singers (verse 44), and the temple servants (verses 46–56). You can use those same names for these groups here. It is not immediately clear who “some from the people” are, and why they are not included in “all Israel.” You could just say “many ordinary people.” However, there is very similar list in [10:28](../10/28.md) that names these same five groups and also describes people who dedicated themselves to following the law of God. That would unfortunately not have included all of Israel at this point, so that may be the distinction that is in view here. Alternate translation: “the priests, the Levites, the gatekeepers, the singers, the temple servants, some people who dedicated themselves to follow the law, and the rest of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 7:73	a2ub		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֵּשְׁב֣וּ & בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם וַ⁠יִּגַּע֙ הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י וּ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	The rebuilding of the wall was completed that year near the end of Elul, the sixth month of the Hebrew calendar. The implication is that everyone who had come to Jerusalem to work on the wall was then allowed to return home. Within about a week, by the beginning of the seventh month, they were all back home. If it would make things clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “So … returned to their homes, because the rebuilding of the wall had been completed. By the beginning of the next month, they were all back home.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 7:73	n26r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י	1	Alternate translation: “month seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-8:intro	w38v				0	# Nehemiah 08 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Reading of the law\n\nDuring the exile, the Hebrew language was no longer spoken. Only the priests and Levites still understood it. Ezra read the book of the law to the people in Hebrew and the Levites walked among the crowd translating it into Aramaic for the people to understand. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Festival of Shelters\n\nAfter they heard Ezra read the law of Moses, the people obeyed it by making temporary shelters for themselves with tree branches. They did this to remember that their ancestors slept in shelters when they came out of slavery in Egypt.
+8:intro	w38v				0	# Nehemiah 08 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Reading of the law\n\nDuring the exile, the Hebrew language was no longer spoken. Only the priests and Levites still understood it. Ezra read the book of the law to the people in Hebrew and the Levites walked among the crowd translating it into Aramaic for the people to understand. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Festival of Shelters\n\nAfter they heard Ezra read the law of Moses, the people obeyed it by making temporary shelters for themselves with tree branches. They did this to remember that their ancestors slept in shelters when they came out of slavery in Egypt.
 8:1	q5ih		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	כָל־הָ⁠עָם֙	1	The word **all** is a generalization that indicates that everyone who was able and available came to Jerusalem for this occasion. By “the people,” Nehemiah means the groups he described in the previous verse who had come back to live in Judah and Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
 8:1	e1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יֵּאָסְפ֤וּ & כְּ⁠אִ֣ישׁ אֶחָ֔ד	1	Verses 8 and 9 explain that the people had gathered for a festival, and [8:2](../08/02.md) states that this was the first day of the seventh month, which means that the people had gathered in Jerusalem for the Festival of Trumpets. In the Law of Moses, Yahweh had commanded the people to observe this celebration on this date. If it would be helpful to your readers to know why the people came together on this day, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “gathered in Jerusalem in a huge crowd for a special celebration known as the Festival of Trumpets.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 8:1	e1a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	כְּ⁠אִ֣ישׁ אֶחָ֔ד	1	**As one man** is an idiom that means “as if they were a single person,” that is, all in once place at the same time. Alternate translation: “gathered in a huge crowd” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 8:8	e1g3			וַ⁠יָּבִ֖ינוּ בַּ⁠מִּקְרָֽא	1	Here **they** refers to the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “That way the people in the crowd could understand what Ezra was reading”
 8:9	e1g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	נְחֶמְיָ֣ה ה֣וּא הַ⁠תִּרְשָׁ֡תָא	1	As in [7:65](../07/65.md) and [7:70](../07/70.md), **Tirshatha** is the formal Persian title of the governor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could simply say “governor,” or you could state the title and then explain it. Alternate translation: “Nehemiah the governor” or “Nehemiah the Tirshatha (that is, the governor)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 8:9	e1g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants	נְחֶמְיָ֣ה ה֣וּא הַ⁠תִּרְשָׁ֡תָא	1	This is the first time that Nehemiah appears as a character while someone else is telling the story. Previously in the book, he has been the one telling the story, and so he has referred to himself as “I.” To give him more of an introduction here, you could say something like, “Nehemiah, who was the governor” or “Nehemiah, who was the Tirshatha (that is, the governor).” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-8:9	e1g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֣ן ׀ הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֡ר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+8:9	e1g9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֣א הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֣ן ׀ הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֡ר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 8:9	e1h1			וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּם֩ הַ⁠מְּבִינִ֨ים אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֜ם	1	See how you translated this phrase in [8:7](../08/07.md). Alternate translation: “The Levites who were explaining the meaning of the Law to the people.”
 8:9	e1h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הַ⁠יּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַ⁠יהוָ֣ה	1	As a note to verse [8:1](../08/01.md) explains, this particular holiday was the Festival of Trumpets. If it would make things clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is a holy day, set apart to worship Yahweh. It is the Festival of Trumpets.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 8:9	e1h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	הַ⁠יּ֤וֹם קָדֹֽשׁ־הוּא֙ לַ⁠יהוָ֣ה	1	These two phrases mean similar things. The leaders were reminding the people that this was one of the festival days that Yahweh had told them to set apart as special times of worship and celebration. If it would be clearer in your language you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “This is a special day for worshiping Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 8:13	e1m1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נֶאֶסְפוּ֩ & אֶל	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered to meet with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 8:13	e1m3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	רָאשֵׁ֨י הָ⁠אָב֜וֹת לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֗ם	1	As in [7:70](../07/70.md), this seems to be an abbreviated way of saying “the heads of father’s houses.” The full expression “father’s house” or “house of the father” is used in [7:61](../07/61.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “some clan leaders from throughout Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 8:13	e1m5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֨י	1	**Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-8:13	e1m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	עֶזְרָ֖א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֑ר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+8:13	e1m7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	עֶזְרָ֖א הַ⁠סֹּפֵ֑ר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 8:13	e1m9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וּ⁠לְ⁠הַשְׂכִּ֖יל אֶל־דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠תּוֹרָֽה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this phrase at the beginning of the verse, since it gives the reason for the rest of the actions that the verse describes. You could show the connection by using a word like “so” after this phrase. Alternate translation: “the people realized that they needed to understand God’s law much better. So …” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 8:13	e1n1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠לְ⁠הַשְׂכִּ֖יל אֶל־דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠תּוֹרָֽה	1	The implication is that while the people realized this, they also realized it would not be practical for large crowds to gather in Jerusalem every day so that all the people could receive Ezra’s teaching at once. Instead, they asked the family and religious leaders in Judah to meet with Ezra and learn from him so that they could then pass the teachings along. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The people realized that they needed to understand God’s law much better, so they asked their family and religious leaders to meet with Ezra and learn more things from him that they could then pass along.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 8:14	e1n3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וַֽ⁠יִּמְצְא֖וּ כָּת֣וּב בַּ⁠תּוֹרָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֤ה יְהוָה֙ בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה	1	**Found** does not mean that these leaders were looking for something, but that they learned this as they were studying with Ezra. Alternate translation: “they learned that in the Law, Yahweh had commanded through Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 8:18	j9aj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	מִן־הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ הָֽ⁠רִאשׁ֔וֹן עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הָ⁠אַחֲר֑וֹן	1	The story is describing the entire festival by speaking of two extreme parts of it, its first day and its last day. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “throughout the entire festival” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 8:18	c1cp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־חָג֙ שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֔ים וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֛י עֲצֶ֖רֶת כַּ⁠מִּשְׁפָּֽט	1	**They** means the people of Judah. The **ordinance** refers to the command in the Law of Moses to end the Festival of Tabernacles by gathering all of the Israelites together for a closing ceremony after seven days. Alternate translation: “The people of Judah celebrated the Festival of Tabernacles for seven days, and on the eighth day they held a closing ceremony together, as the Law of Moses commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 8:18	er1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֛י	1	Alternate translation: “on day 8” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-9:intro	sj1h				0	# Nehemiah 09 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter and the next one form a single section.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Prayer to God\n\nThe people prayed and thanked God for his care for them and the blessings he gave to them. They also confessed their sin of disobeying him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/bless]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/confess]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Learning from their ancestor’s mistakes\nThis chapter teaches that the Jews learned from the mistakes of their ancestors. They became determined to worship Yahweh alone, to not intermarry with other peoples, and to worship Yahweh as the law of Moses instructed them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Recalling the great power of God\nIt was common to recall the great things God did for Israel. This is a reminder to Israel of God’s power. It is intended to bring the people to repentance and proper worship of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
+9:intro	sj1h				0	# Nehemiah 09 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter and the next one form a single section.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Prayer to God\n\nThe people prayed and thanked God for his care for them and the blessings he gave to them. They also confessed their sin of disobeying him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/bless]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/confess]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Learning from their ancestor’s mistakes\nThis chapter teaches that the Jews learned from the mistakes of their ancestors. They became determined to worship Yahweh alone, to not intermarry with other peoples, and to worship Yahweh as the law of Moses instructed them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Recalling the great power of God\nIt was common to recall the great things God did for Israel. This is a reminder to Israel of God’s power. It is intended to bring the people to repentance and proper worship of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
 9:1	w8w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths	וּ⁠בְ⁠יוֹם֩ עֶשְׂרִ֨ים וְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֜ה לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֗ה	1	**This month** means the seventh month of that year according to the Hebrew calendar, as specified in [8:2](../08/02.md) and [8:14](../08/14.md). The Law of Moses said to observe the Festival of Tabernacles from the fifteenth through the twenty-second days of that month. The implication is that after that joyful celebration, the people were given one full day to rest and prepare for the gathering that this chapter describes. It had a different and more solemn purpose. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “On the twenty-fourth day of the seventh month of that year, two days after the joyful Festival of Tabernacles had ended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
 9:1	f1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	וּ⁠בְ⁠יוֹם֩ עֶשְׂרִ֨ים וְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֜ה לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֗ה	1	Alternate translation: “On day 24 of month 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 9:1	lm7m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נֶאֶסְפ֤וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1258,7 +1258,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 9:38	xee9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אֲנַ֛חְנוּ כֹּרְתִ֥ים	1	As in [9:8](../09/08.md), to “cut” a covenant is a Hebrew idiom for making a solemn agreement with a person. Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “we are making a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 9:38	l6qa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠כֹתְבִ֑ים וְ⁠עַל֙ הֶֽ⁠חָת֔וּם שָׂרֵ֥י⁠נוּ לְוִיֵּ֖⁠נוּ כֹּהֲנֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	The implication is that the Israelites had scribes write this covenant on a scroll, the leaders wrote their names on it representing all the people, and then the Israelites sealed the document to make it official and to preserve it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “We are writing this covenant on a scroll. The community leaders, the Levites, and the priests will sign it. And then we will seal it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 9:38	wj7b			שָׂרֵ֥י⁠נוּ	1	This means the community leaders. From the document itself, it appears that these included both Nehemiah as the governor (10:1) and various tribal and extended-family leaders (10:14–27).
-10:intro	m17y				0	# Nehemiah 10 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter concludes the passage beginning in chapter 9.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The vow\n\nBy signing this document, the people vowed or agreed to obey God, not to buy things on the Sabbath, and to pay their temple tax. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/vow]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])
+10:intro	m17y				0	# Nehemiah 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter concludes the passage beginning in chapter 9.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The vow\n\nBy signing this document, the people vowed or agreed to obey God, not to buy things on the Sabbath, and to pay their temple tax. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/vow]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])
 10:1	ijh7			וְ⁠עַ֖ל הַ⁠חֲתוּמִ֑ים	1	Alternate translation: “These are the names that the leaders signed on the scroll before it was sealed.”
 10:1	jc8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	נְחֶמְיָ֧ה הַ⁠תִּרְשָׁ֛תָא בֶּן־חֲכַלְיָ֖ה	1	As in [7:65](../07/65.md) and [7:70](../07/70.md), this was the formal Persian title of the governor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the title and then explain it. Alternate translation: “Nehemiah son of Hakiliah, the Tirshatha (that is, the governor)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 10:1	j4ny		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	נְחֶמְיָ֧ה & בֶּן־חֲכַלְיָ֖ה וְ⁠צִדְקִיָּֽה	1	As in [1:1](../01/01.md), Nehemiah is the name of a man, and Hakaliah is the name of his father. Zedekiah is also the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 10:37	g1f9			וְ⁠הֵם֙ הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם הַֽ⁠מְעַשְּׂרִ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל עָרֵ֥י עֲבֹדָתֵֽ⁠נוּ	1	This phrase explains where the people are agreeing to deliver this tithe of crops, which is a special contribution for the Levites. Alternate translation: “The Levites can collect this contribution of one tenth of our crops right in the cities where we live and work”
 10:37	g1g1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל עָרֵ֥י עֲבֹדָתֵֽ⁠נוּ	1	The abstract noun **labor** refers to how the people would work the land in order to grow crops. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind it with a verb such as **work.** Alternate translation: “the cities where we live and work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 10:38	g1g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הָיָ֨ה הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֧ן בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן עִם־הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֖ם בַּ⁠עְשֵׂ֣ר הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֑ם	1	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why a priest will be present. Alternate translation: “a priest will be present to supervise when the people give their tithes to the Levites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-10:38	g1g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֧ן בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who the priests were. Alternate translation: “one of the priests, who are descendants of Aaron” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+10:38	g1g5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֧ן בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who the priests were. Alternate translation: “one of the priests, who are descendants of Aaron” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 10:38	g1g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בֶּֽן־אַהֲרֹ֛ן	1	**Son** here figuratively means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of Aaron” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 10:38	by9z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בַּ⁠עְשֵׂ֣ר הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֑ם	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could state from whom the Levites will receive these tithes. Alternate translation: “when the people give their tithes to the Levites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 10:38	eb51		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction	בַּ⁠עְשֵׂ֣ר & מַעֲשַׂ֤ר הַֽ⁠מַּעֲשֵׂר֙	1	A “tithe” means a tenth (1/10) or one part out of ten equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
@@ -1377,10 +1377,10 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 10:39	g1h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	כְּלֵ֣י	1	Here the covenant uses one type of equipment that the storerooms would hold, **vessels** or “jars” or “containers,” to refer figuratively to all the different types of equipment on the list in this verse. Alternate translation: “equipment” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 10:39	u1sq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes	וְ⁠לֹ֥א נַעֲזֹ֖ב אֶת־בֵּ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	This is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “we will make sure that we provide for the temple” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
 10:39	b23h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בֵּ֥ית אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ	1	The covenant continues to speak of the temple figuratively as the **house of God**, as if it were God’s dwelling place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-11:intro	xja1				0	# Nehemiah 11 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The places where the Jews lived\n\nSome people lived in Jerusalem, but most people lived in villages and towns away from Jerusalem. They lived there in order to farm the land and raise their animals. The city with its walls was there to provide all of the people with protection if enemies attacked them.
+11:intro	xja1				0	# Nehemiah 11 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The places where the Jews lived\n\nSome people lived in Jerusalem, but most people lived in villages and towns away from Jerusalem. They lived there in order to farm the land and raise their animals. The city with its walls was there to provide all of the people with protection if enemies attacked them.
 11:1	e2yg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הִפִּ֨ילוּ גוֹרָל֜וֹת	1	As in [10:34](../10/34.md), a **lot** was a physical object that was used in various ways to make a selection among different possibilities. Use the term in your language that would best describe such an object for your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 11:1	beq5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	אֶחָ֣ד מִן־הָ⁠עֲשָׂרָ֗ה	1	This means “one out of ten people.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-11:1	h1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	בִּֽ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ עִ֣יר הַ⁠קֹּ֔דֶשׁ	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers about the special status that Jerusalem had, which was why it was so important for that city to be well populated. As in [1:9](../01/09.md), the list is acknowledging Jerusalem as the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world, and as the city where God chose to put his temple. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+11:1	h1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בִּֽ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ עִ֣יר הַ⁠קֹּ֔דֶשׁ	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers about the special status that Jerusalem had, which was why it was so important for that city to be well populated. As in [1:9](../01/09.md), the list is acknowledging Jerusalem as the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world, and as the city where God chose to put his temple. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 11:1	h1a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠תֵ֥שַׁע הַ⁠יָּד֖וֹת בֶּ⁠עָרִֽים	1	Here the list is using the term **hand** to refer figuratively to an entire person. Alternate translation: “the other nine out of ten people remained in the cities and towns where they had been living” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 11:2	h1a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	לְ⁠כֹל֙ הָֽ⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים	1	In this context, **a man** means “everyone.” Alternate translation: “everyone who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 11:3	h1a7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֣י הַ⁠מְּדִינָ֔ה	1	**Head** here is a figurative way of saying **leader.** Alternate translation: “provincial leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1458,7 +1458,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 11:17	dy1v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal	מִשְׁנֶ֣ה	1	Alternate translation: “the next in command” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 11:17	h1i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	וְ⁠עַבְדָּא֙ בֶּן־שַׁמּ֔וּעַ בֶּן־גָּלָ֖ל בֶּן־יְדוּתֽוּן	1	These are the names of four men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 11:18	h1i3			כָּל־הַ⁠לְוִיִּם֙ בְּ⁠עִ֣יר הַ⁠קֹּ֔דֶשׁ מָאתַ֖יִם שְׁמֹנִ֥ים וְ⁠אַרְבָּעָֽה	1	Alternate translation: “The total number of Levites who settled in Jerusalem was 284”
-11:18	di19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	בְּ⁠עִ֣יר הַ⁠קֹּ֔דֶשׁ	1	As in [11:1](../11/01.md), this phrase describes Jerusalem as the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world, and as the city where God chose to put his temple. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+11:18	di19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בְּ⁠עִ֣יר הַ⁠קֹּ֔דֶשׁ	1	As in [11:1](../11/01.md), this phrase describes Jerusalem as the place from which God chose to start making himself famous throughout the world, and as the city where God chose to put his temple. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem, the special city that God chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 11:18	hk8i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers	מָאתַ֖יִם שְׁמֹנִ֥ים וְ⁠אַרְבָּעָֽה	1	Alternate translation: “two hundred and eighty-four” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 11:19	i92r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַ⁠שּֽׁוֹעֲרִים֙	1	The implication is that this next section of the list will name the men who were leaders of the gatekeepers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the leaders of the gatekeepers who settled in Jerusalem:” followed by the list of names. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 11:19	h1i5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	וְ⁠הַ⁠שּֽׁוֹעֲרִים֙	1	This means the people who were responsible to open and close the gates that controlled access to the city or perhaps the temple. See how you translated this term in [7:1](../07/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1476,7 +1476,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 11:22	l3ba			וּ⁠פְקִ֤יד הַ⁠לְוִיִּם֙ בִּ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלִַ֔ם	1	Alternate translation: “the supervisor of the Levites who settled in Jerusalem”
 11:22	rr5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עֻזִּ֤י בֶן־בָּנִי֙ בֶּן־חֲשַׁבְיָ֔ה בֶּן־מַתַּנְיָ֖ה בֶּן־מִיכָ֑א	1	These are the names of five men. In this context, **son** means literally that the next man named is the father of the man just named. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 11:22	h1k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מִ⁠בְּנֵ֤י אָסָף֙	1	**Sons** here figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “who were descendants of Asaph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-11:22	h1k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠מְשֹׁ֣רְרִ֔ים	1	Here the list supplies some background information that reminds readers what the Levites in the temple were primarily responsible for. Alternate translation: “and who performed music” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+11:22	h1k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠מְשֹׁ֣רְרִ֔ים	1	Here the list supplies some background information that reminds readers what the Levites in the temple were primarily responsible for. Alternate translation: “and who performed music” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 11:22	h1k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠נֶ֖גֶד מְלֶ֥אכֶת בֵּית־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים	1	Here the list speaks of the temple figuratively as the **house of God** as if it were God’s dwelling place. By contrast with the Levites described in [11:16](../11/16.md), these Levites were responsible for all the duties that had to be performed inside the temple itself. Alternate translation: “who were responsible for the work that was done inside the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 11:23	h1k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	כִּֽי	1	This word indicates that the information that follows provides further background information about this situation. You could express the same meaning with a word that indicates this in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 11:23	km8l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם	1	Here the list speaks figuratively of the commandment as if it rested upon the Levite singers. Alternate translation: “the king had given orders concerning them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1511,11 +1511,11 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 11:33	jwf8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חָצ֥וֹר ׀ רָמָ֖ה גִּתָּֽיִם	1	These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 11:34	e1ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	חָדִ֥יד צְבֹעִ֖ים נְבַלָּֽט	1	These are the names of three towns. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 11:35	h1n7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לֹ֥ד וְ⁠אוֹנ֖וֹ	1	These are the names of two towns. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-11:35	h1n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	גֵּ֥י הַחֲרָשִֽׁים	1	Here the list supplies some background information that reminds readers what the town of Ono was known for. It was a center for craftsmen. Alternate translation: “which was a center for craftsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+11:35	h1n9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	גֵּ֥י הַחֲרָשִֽׁים	1	Here the list supplies some background information that reminds readers what the town of Ono was known for. It was a center for craftsmen. Alternate translation: “which was a center for craftsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 11:36	h1o1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	וּ⁠מִן	1	This phrase indicates that yet another group will now be in focus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this contrast with an expression such as “finally” (since this is also the last group on the list). Alternate translation: “Finally, from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 11:36	h1o3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠מִן־הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם מַחְלְק֥וֹת יְהוּדָ֖ה לְ⁠בִנְיָמִֽין	1	Here the list is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning seems to be that certain sections of the Levite community that had previously lived in the territory that had belonged to the tribe of Judah went to live in the territory that had belonged to the tribe of Benjamin rather than returning to their former homeland. Alternate translation: “some of the Levites whose families had lived in the territory of Judah now went to live in the territory of Benjamin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 11:36	y212		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מִן־הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם מַחְלְק֥וֹת יְהוּדָ֖ה לְ⁠בִנְיָמִֽין	1	The book does not say explicitly why these Levites moved to a different area. However, one reasonable inference in light of the overall themes of the book of Nehemiah is that they did this so that there would be people throughout the entire area where the Israelites were living who could explain the law to them. If that would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the Levites whose families had lived in the territory of Judah now went to live in the territory of Benjamin so that they could teach God’s law to the people living there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-12:intro	xmt3				0	# Nehemiah 12 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Dedication of the wall\n\nIn the ancient Near East, it was common to dedicate an important structure to a god. When it was completed, the wall was dedicated to Yahweh. Long lists of people are present, indicating that “everyone” was present for this and praised Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
+12:intro	xmt3				0	# Nehemiah 12 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Dedication of the wall\n\nIn the ancient Near East, it was common to dedicate an important structure to a god. When it was completed, the wall was dedicated to Yahweh. Long lists of people are present, indicating that “everyone” was present for this and praised Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
 12:1	i1a1			וְ⁠אֵ֨לֶּה֙ הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָל֛וּ עִם־זְרֻבָּבֶ֥ל בֶּן־שְׁאַלְתִּיאֵ֖ל וְ⁠יֵשׁ֑וּעַ	1	The implication of the list in verses 1–25 of this chapter is that the priests and Levites had dependable records of their ancestry. So when Nehemiah called them back into service for the dedication of the wall and the collection of offerings, as described in the rest of this chapter, he was employing the people with exactly the lineage that the law required. Throughout this book, Nehemiah stresses how he made sure that the people of Judah were not only organized and well-protected, but also obedient to the law. This is one more example of that latter concern. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Here is a record that shows that the priests and Levites had dependable records of their ancestry. It begins with the priests who first returned to Judah with Zerubbabel the son of Shealtiel, their governor, and with Joshua the high priest.”
 12:1	ixs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	עָל֛וּ	1	As in [7:6](../07/06.md) and [7:61](../07/61.md), **went up** means “traveled from Babylon back to Judah,” since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 12:1	b4x7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עִם־זְרֻבָּבֶ֥ל בֶּן־שְׁאַלְתִּיאֵ֖ל	1	This was the man who led the first group of Jews who returned to the province of Judah about a hundred years before the time of Nehemiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “under the leadership of Zerubbabel the son of Shealtiel, their governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 12:5	x3ri		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מִיָּמִ֥ין מַֽעַדְיָ֖ה בִּלְגָּֽה	1	These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 12:6	udm2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	שְׁמַֽעְיָ֥ה וְ⁠יוֹיָרִ֖יב יְדַֽעְיָֽה	1	These are names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 12:7	g43p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	סַלּ֣וּ עָמ֔וֹק חִלְקִיָּ֖ה יְדַֽעְיָ֑ה	1	These are names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-12:7	i1a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	אֵ֣לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם בִּ⁠ימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ	1	This is a summary statement about the 22 men who have just been named. Alternate translation: “These men were the leaders of the priests in their own divisions while Joshua was the high priest.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+12:7	i1a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	אֵ֣לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם בִּ⁠ימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ	1	This is a summary statement about the 22 men who have just been named. Alternate translation: “These men were the leaders of the priests in their own divisions while Joshua was the high priest.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 12:7	i1a7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	**Head** here is a figurative way of saying “leader.” Alternate translation: “the leaders of the priests in their own divisions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 12:7	i1a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	רָאשֵׁ֧י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֛ים וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֖ם	1	In this context, **and** means “that is,” so the full expression means, “the leaders of the priests, that is, the ones who were their ‘brothers.’” **Brother** itself is a figurative way of saying “fellow priests,” and in this context specifically means “the priests in their own divisions.” (King David had divided the priests into divisions so that they could rotate their responsibilities, and the Israelites reconstituted these divisions after the exile.) It is possible that some of the people in each division were the biological brothers of the leaders named, since the divisions were created based on close kinship ties, but the word “brother” is essentially figurative. Alternate translation: “their fellow priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 12:7	i1b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בִּ⁠ימֵ֥י יֵשֽׁוּעַ	1	The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “in the time of Joshua” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1594,7 +1594,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 12:24	i1f5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֣ם לְ⁠נֶגְדָּ֔⁠ם & מִשְׁמָ֖ר לְ⁠עֻמַּ֥ת מִשְׁמָֽר	1	As in [12:9](../12/09.md), this could mean one of two things. (1) It could mean that Hashabiah, Sherebiah, and Jeshua directed one choir, and other Levite leaders directed a second choir that stood opposite to this first one and sang responses to what it sang. (2) It could mean that other Levite leaders took turns with these three men in assuming the responsibilities of directing a single Levite choir. Alternate translation: “their fellow Levite leaders directed a second choir that sang responses” or “their fellow Levite leaders took turns with them directing the choir” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 12:24	i1f7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וַ⁠אֲחֵי⁠הֶ֣ם	1	**Brothers** here figuratively means **their fellow Levite leaders.** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 12:24	i1f9			לְ⁠הַלֵּ֣ל לְ⁠הוֹד֔וֹת	1	Alternate translation: “the choir that sang songs of praise and thanksgiving”
-12:24	j1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	בְּ⁠מִצְוַ֖ת דָּוִ֣יד אִישׁ־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	Here the book offers some background information to remind readers of the character of David, who had been a great founding king of Israel. Alternate translation: “as King David, that godly man, had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+12:24	j1a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	בְּ⁠מִצְוַ֖ת דָּוִ֣יד אִישׁ־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	Here the book offers some background information to remind readers of the character of David, who had been a great founding king of Israel. Alternate translation: “as King David, that godly man, had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 12:25	p55l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	מַתַּנְיָ֧ה וּ⁠בַקְבֻּֽקְיָ֛ה עֹבַדְיָ֥ה מְשֻׁלָּ֖ם טַלְמ֣וֹן עַקּ֑וּב	1	These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 12:25	j1a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	שֹׁמְרִ֤ים שֽׁוֹעֲרִים֙ מִשְׁמָ֔ר בַּ⁠אֲסֻפֵּ֖י הַ⁠שְּׁעָרִֽים	1	Since, in context, these men appear to have been Levites, the **gates** described are likely the gates of the temple. It seems that there were rooms above the temple gateways that were used as storehouses or treasuries, and these men were responsible for overseeing and protecting them. Alternate translation: “guarded the store rooms above the gateways to the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 12:26	j1a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	אֵ֕לֶּה	1	Here the book leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. This seems to mean, “These are the names of the men who served in this capacity.” You could say something like that if it would be helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -1602,7 +1602,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 12:26	wk2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יוֹיָקִ֥ים בֶּן־יֵשׁ֖וּעַ בֶּן־יוֹצָדָ֑ק	1	Joiakim is the name of a man, Joshua is the name of his father, and Jozadak is the name of his grandfather. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 12:26	k9bk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠בִ⁠ימֵי֙ נְחֶמְיָ֣ה הַ⁠פֶּחָ֔ה	1	This would have been one generation later, since [3:1](../03/01.md) says that Eliashib was the high priest during the time of Nehemiah, and [12:10](../12/10.md) says that Eliashib was the son of Joiakim. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also in the next generation, during the time when Nehemiah was the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 12:26	j1a9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠בִ⁠ימֵי֙ נְחֶמְיָ֣ה הַ⁠פֶּחָ֔ה	1	The term **days** is used figuratively here to refer a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “and also during the time when Nehemiah was the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-12:26	j1b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֥א הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֖ן הַ⁠סּוֹפֵֽר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “and he worked with Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+12:26	j1b1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֥א הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֖ן הַ⁠סּוֹפֵֽר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “and he worked with Ezra, who was a priest and a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 12:27	e63y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲנֻכַּ֞ת חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֗ם	1	In this book, Nehemiah tells his personal story from [1:1](../01/01.md) through [7:5](../07/05.md). In that story, he explains how he was concerned not just to restore the city of Jerusalem physically by rebuilding its wall, but also to restore its population by bringing in people who were genuine Israelites, and to restore worship by making sure that the priests and Levites who were doing assigned tasks had dependable records of their ancestry. He includes the long series of lists from [7:6](../07/06.md) through [12:26](../12/26.md) to document that these priests, Levites, and Israelites had the lineage that the Law of Moses required. Now Nehemiah resumes his personal story, and he tells what he did next. He organized a worship ceremony to dedicate the city wall. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put some introductory and transitional sentence here to show how the book is progressing. Alternate translation: “once we had brought many more Israelites to live in Jerusalem, and once we had established the priests and Levites in their tasks, we held a ceremony to dedicate the rebuilt wall of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 12:27	j1b3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲנֻכַּ֞ת חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֗ם	1	The abstract noun **dedication** refers to the way the wall would be set apart for a special purpose. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a verb such as “set apart.” Alternate translation: “to set apart the wall of Jerusalem for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 12:27	j1b5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction	וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲנֻכַּ֞ת חוֹמַ֣ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֗ם	1	Dedicating the wall was a symbolic way of dedicating, or rather rededicating, the entire city to the special purpose that God had chosen it for. The rebuilt wall now defined Jerusalem once again as a distinct place, the place from which God had chosen to start making himself famous throughout the world. Alternate translation: “to set apart the wall of Jerusalem for a special purpose, to show that God had set apart the city for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1641,9 +1641,9 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 12:36	j1g3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְֽ⁠אֶחָ֡י⁠ו	1	Here, **brother** is a figurative way of saying “fellow priest,” although it is possible that some of the biological brothers of Zechariah were included in this group. Alternate translation: “his fellow priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 12:36	kmk3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	שְֽׁמַעְיָ֡ה וַ⁠עֲזַרְאֵ֡ל מִֽלֲלַ֡י גִּֽלֲלַ֡י מָעַ֞י נְתַנְאֵ֤ל וִֽ⁠יהוּדָה֙ חֲנָ֔נִי	1	These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 12:36	j1g4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	בִּ⁠כְלֵי־שִׁ֥יר דָּוִ֖יד אִ֣ישׁ הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	This likely means the cymbals, harps, and lyres mentioned in [12:27](../12/27.md). Those were the instruments that King David had originally instructed the Levite musicians to play. The people honored that religious tradition on this occasion. Alternate translation: “with cymbals, harps, and lyres, the instruments that King David, that godly man, had originally instructed the Levite musicians to play” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-12:36	j1g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	דָּוִ֖יד אִ֣ישׁ הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	Here the book offers some background information to remind readers of the character of David, who had been a great founding king of Israel. Alternate translation: “King David, that godly man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+12:36	j1g7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	דָּוִ֖יד אִ֣ישׁ הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים	1	Here the book offers some background information to remind readers of the character of David, who had been a great founding king of Israel. Alternate translation: “King David, that godly man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 12:36	n2tl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֥א הַ⁠סּוֹפֵ֖ר לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם	1	Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a group of people. Alternate translation: “Ezra the scribe walked in front of this group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-12:36	j1h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֥א הַ⁠סּוֹפֵ֖ר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+12:36	j1h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	וְ⁠עֶזְרָ֥א הַ⁠סּוֹפֵ֖ר	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Ezra was. Alternate translation: “Ezra, who was a scribe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 12:37	c38r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠עַל֩ שַׁ֨עַר הָ⁠עַ֜יִן וְ⁠נֶגְדָּ֗⁠ם עָלוּ֙ עַֽל־מַעֲלוֹת֙ עִ֣יר דָּוִ֔יד בַּֽ⁠מַּעֲלֶ֖ה לַ⁠חוֹמָ֑ה	1	The implication, which the original audience of the book would apparently have understood, is that when this first procession reached the place described, rather than continue walking on the wall, which was about to follow a winding course around a hill, they took these stairs straight up the hill, and they rejoined the wall at the place where it went up to the top of the hill. Alternate translation: “When they reached the Fountain Gate, they left the wall and went up the stairs that were in front of them that led to the City of David. They came back onto the wall at the place where it reached the top of the hill they had just climbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 12:37	j1h3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	שַׁ֨עַר הָ⁠עַ֜יִן	1	This is the name of one of the gates of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translation: “the Fountain Gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 12:37	j1h5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עִ֣יר דָּוִ֔יד	1	This was one part of Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translation: “the City of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1699,7 +1699,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 12:47	j1o7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֩ בִּ⁠ימֵ֨י זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל וּ⁠בִ⁠ימֵ֣י נְחֶמְיָ֗ה נֹֽתְנִ֛ים מְנָי֛וֹת הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֥ים	1	As in [12:44](../12/44.md), the abstract noun **portion** refers to the part of each crop that the Israelites contributed to support the temple personnel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a different phrase. Alternate translation: “all the Israelites contributed from their harvests to support the singers and the gatekeepers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 12:47	j1o9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	דְּבַר־י֣וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמ֑⁠וֹ	1	As in [11:23](../11/23.md), this is an idiom that means **as each day required** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 12:47	j1p1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠מַקְדִּשִׁים֙ לַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם וְ⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֔ם מַקְדִּשִׁ֖ים לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י אַהֲרֹֽן	1	**They** means the Israelites, as in the previous sentence. **Consecrating** means **setting apart.** This is likely a reference to the tithe or 1/10 of crops that the Israelites promised in their covenant to give to support the Levites, and to the tithe of this tithe that the Levites then contributed to support the priests, as described in [10:37–38](../10/37.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Israelites also gave a tenth of their crops to support the Levites, just as they had promised, and the Levites gave a tenth of this tenth to support the priests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-13:intro	tm5a				0	# Nehemiah 13 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Nehemiah returns to Jerusalem\n\nNehemiah was eager to make sure that the Jews kept their promise to obey the law. When he returned from Persia, he found many things wrong: one of the store rooms in the temple had been converted into a guest room for Tobiah, the Levites had not received their portions for working in the temple, people were working on the Sabbath, and many had married heathen wives. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
+13:intro	tm5a				0	# Nehemiah 13 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Nehemiah returns to Jerusalem\n\nNehemiah was eager to make sure that the Jews kept their promise to obey the law. When he returned from Persia, he found many things wrong: one of the store rooms in the temple had been converted into a guest room for Tobiah, the Levites had not received their portions for working in the temple, people were working on the Sabbath, and many had married heathen wives. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
 13:1	k1a1			בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא	1	As noted for [12:43](../12/43.md) and [12:44](../12/44.md), this is a flexible expression that can mean either “on that same day” or “around that time.” Either meaning might fit the context here, so you could choose to say either one in your translation.
 13:1	k1a3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נִקְרָ֛א בְּ⁠סֵ֥פֶר מֹשֶׁ֖ה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we read from the scroll that contained the Law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 13:1	k9za		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם	1	Here, **ears** stand for hearing. Alternate translation: “out loud so that all the people could hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1720,7 +1720,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 13:4	k1c9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י מִ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	This phrase indicates that the events the story will now relate came before the events it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “but before all this happened.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 13:4	k1d1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י מִ⁠זֶּ֔ה	1	In this book, the expression **face** often refers figuratively to the front of a person, place, or object. Here the expression has the further figurative significance of “in front of” or “before” a certain time. Alternate translation: “before this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 13:4	k1d3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙	1	This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-13:4	k1d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֔ן	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. As we learn in [3:1](../03/01.md), [3:20](../03/20.md), and [12:10](../12/10.md), he was actually the Jewish high priest during the time of Nehemiah. Alternate translation: “the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+13:4	k1d5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֔ן	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. As we learn in [3:1](../03/01.md), [3:20](../03/20.md), and [12:10](../12/10.md), he was actually the Jewish high priest during the time of Nehemiah. Alternate translation: “the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 13:4	bq8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֔ן נָת֖וּן	1	If it is clearer in your language, you can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “they appointed Eliashib the priest” or “the leaders appointed Eliashib the priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 13:4	k1d7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	נָת֖וּן בְּ⁠לִשְׁכַּ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ	1	This is most likely a figurative way of saying that as high priest, Eliashib had responsibility for and control over all the rooms in the temple. Alternate translation: “since he had control over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 13:4	adq9			קָר֖וֹב לְ⁠טוֹבִיָּֽה	1	Since Tobiah was an Ammonite, Eliashib could not have been his close blood relative. So this expression must refer to a connection by marriage. We learn in [6:18](../06/18.md) that both Tobiah and his son had married Jewish women, and one or both of these women may have been relatives of Eliashib. Alternate translation: “who was related to Tobiah by marriage”
@@ -1761,7 +1761,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 13:10	k1j7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וַ⁠יִּבְרְח֧וּ אִישׁ־לְ⁠שָׂדֵ֛⁠הוּ	1	The implication is that the Levites had had to return to farming their own land because they no longer received from the people the support they needed to be able to serve in the temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all of the Levites had left the temple and returned to farming their own land because they had all stopped receiving the support that enabled them to serve in the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 13:10	f2ng		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וַ⁠יִּבְרְח֧וּ	1	In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 13:10	k1j9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִישׁ־לְ⁠שָׂדֵ֛⁠הוּ	1	In this context, **a man** means **each one of them** or **every one of them** Alternate translation: “all of the Levites had returned to farming their own land” or “each of the Levites had returned to farming his own land”\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-13:10	k1k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֥ם וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים עֹשֵׂ֥י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָֽה	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who the Levites and the singers were. Alternate translation: “the Levites and the singers, who were responsible for the worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+13:10	k1k1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הַ⁠לְוִיִּ֥ם וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים עֹשֵׂ֥י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָֽה	1	Here the book repeats some background information to remind readers who the Levites and the singers were. Alternate translation: “the Levites and the singers, who were responsible for the worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 13:10	k1k3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	עֹשֵׂ֥י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָֽה	1	**The work** is an abbreviated way of saying “the work of the house of our God” as in [10:33](../10/33.md) or “the work of the house of God” as in [11:12](../11/12.md), that is, the work of the temple, meaning specifically everything required to maintain the worship there. Alternate translation: “who were responsible for the worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 13:11	k1k5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential	וָ⁠אָרִ֨יבָ⁠ה֙	1	In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this event took place after the event the story has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “and after that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 13:11	k1k7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וָ⁠אָרִ֨יבָ⁠ה֙ אֶת־הַ⁠סְּגָנִ֔ים	1	As in [5:7](../05/07.md), **contended** is a technical term that describes a public accusation that requires the defendants to answer for themselves in the presence of their fellow citizens. Alternate translation: “Then I called the city officials to account publicly for what they had allowed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1869,7 +1869,7 @@ front:intro	k2y2				0	# Introduction to Nehemiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 13:28	k1gg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֨י	1	In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that this sentence will provide background information that is necessary for understanding the next event the book will describe. You could express the same meaning with a word that indicates this in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
 13:28	k1hh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֨י	1	This means **one of the sons of.** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 13:28	dft4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יוֹיָדָ֤ע בֶּן־אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙	1	Joiada is the name of a man, and Eliashib is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-13:28	k2i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֣ן הַ⁠גָּד֔וֹל	1	Here Nehemiah repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. Alternate translation: “Eliashib, who was the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+13:28	k2i2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֣ן הַ⁠גָּד֔וֹל	1	Here Nehemiah repeats some background information to remind readers who Eliashib was. Alternate translation: “Eliashib, who was the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 13:28	k1ii			חָתָ֖ן	1	Alternate translation: “had married the daughter of”
 13:28	f8ak		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	לְ⁠סַנְבַלַּ֣ט הַ⁠חֹרֹנִ֑י	1	Sanballat is the name of a man, and Horonite is the name of his people group. See how you translated these words in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 13:28	rhs8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וָ⁠אַבְרִיחֵ֖⁠הוּ	1	In this context, the conjunction **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “because he had done this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])

tn_OBA.tsv

@@ -1,141 +1,154 @@
 Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
-front:intro	jrz8				0	# Introduction to Obadiah\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Obadiah\n\n1. Yahweh will judge Edom (1:1-16)\n- Yahweh will destroy Edom (1:1–9)\n- Why Yahweh will destroy Edom (1:10–14)\n1. Yahweh will judge the nations (1:15–16)\n1. Yahweh will deliver his people (1:17–21)\n\n### What is the Book of Obadiah about?\n\nAfter Babylon destroyed Jerusalem, the Edomites captured fleeing Jews. Then they gave these Jews over to Babylon. The Book of Obadiah is about Yahweh judging the Edomites for harming his people. This book would be comforting to the exiled people of Judah.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThis book is traditionally titled “The Book of Obadiah” or just “Obadiah.” Translators may decide to use a clearer title such as “The Sayings of Obadiah.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Obadiah?\n\nThe prophet Obadiah probably wrote this book. We know nothing more about Obadiah. His name in Hebrew means “Servant of Yahweh.”\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was Edom’s relationship to Israel?\n\nObadiah referred to Edom as Israel’s brother. This is because the Edomites descended from Esau, and the Israelites descended from Jacob. Jacob and Esau were brothers. This made Edom’s betrayal of Israel much worse.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How do I translate the concept of “pride”?\n\nThe Book of Obadiah speaks of the pride of Edom. This meant that the Edomites thought their enemies or Yahweh could not defeat them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/proud]])
-1:1	xm1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	חֲז֖וֹן עֹֽבַדְיָ֑ה	1	This is the title of the book. Here **vision** is used in the general sense of a message from Yahweh, rather than to indicate how Obadiah received that message. **Vision** here is a metaphor for a way of getting knowledge from God. Alternate translation: “The message that God gave to Obadiah” or “The prophecy of Obadiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:1	jdr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עֹֽבַדְיָ֑ה	1	Some English translations call the prophet Abdias, but Obadiah is the form of his name most commonly used in English. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:1	sv9x			כֹּֽה־אָמַר֩ אֲדֹנָ֨⁠י יְהוִ֜ה לֶ⁠אֱד֗וֹם	1	This tells the reader that the entire book is a message about Edom.
+front:intro	jrz8				0	# Introduction to Obadiah\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Obadiah\n\n1. Yahweh will judge Edom (1:1-16) A. Yahweh will destroy Edom (1:1–9) B. Why Yahweh will destroy Edom (1:10–14)\n2. Yahweh will judge the nations (1:15–16)\n3. Yahweh will deliver his people (1:17–21)\n\n### What is the Book of Obadiah about?\n\nAfter the nation of Babylon destroyed Jerusalem, the Edomites (from the neighboring land of Edom) captured fleeing Jews. Then they gave these Jews over to Babylon. The Book of Obadiah is about Yahweh judging the Edomites for harming his people. This book would be comforting to the people of Judah who had been captured and forced to live in Babylon.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nThis book is traditionally titled “The Book of Obadiah” or just “Obadiah.” Translators may decide to use a clearer title such as “The Sayings of Obadiah.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Obadiah?\n\nThe prophet Obadiah probably wrote this book. We know nothing more about Obadiah. His name in Hebrew means “Servant of Yahweh.”\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was Edom’s relationship to Israel?\n\nObadiah referred to Edom as Israel’s brother. This is because the Edomites descended from Esau, and the Israelites descended from Jacob. Jacob and Esau were twin brothers. This made Edom’s betrayal of Israel much worse. The notes also refer to the Israelites as the people of Judah. Judah was the part of Israel that had survived the earlier destruction by the nation of Assyria and that was later captured by the nation of Babylon when the nation of Edom did not help them.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How do I translate the concept of “pride?”\n\nThe Book of Obadiah speaks of the pride of Edom. This meant that the Edomites thought that neither their enemies nor Yahweh could defeat them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/proud]])\n\n### When Obadiah is addressing Edom, should I use a singular or plural form of “you?”\n\nSince Obadiah addressed the people of Edom figuratively by referring to them as the nation of Edom, he used a singular form in the original language. But if you are using more plain language and want your translation to be clear that it is addressing the people of Edom, you can use a plural form.
+1:1	xm1w		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	חֲז֖וֹן עֹֽבַדְיָ֑ה	1	This is the title of the book. Here **vision** is used in the general sense of a message from Yahweh, rather than to indicate how Obadiah received that message. **Vision** here is a metaphor for the way that God gives knowledge to people. Alternate translation: “The message that God gave to Obadiah” or “The prophecy of Obadiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:1	jdr1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עֹֽבַדְיָ֑ה	1	Some English translations call the prophet Abdias, but Obadiah is the form of his name most commonly used in English. Use the form of the name that is used in your source language or a form that is similar that sounds like a name in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1:1	sv9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	כֹּֽה־אָמַר֩ אֲדֹנָ֨⁠י יְהוִ֜ה	1	This introduces the rest of the book as a message from God. Use a form here that is natural in your language for introducing what someone says. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 1:1	s7if		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	יְהוִ֜ה	1	This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:1	jdr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֶ⁠אֱד֗וֹם	1	The people are being described by the name of something closely associated with them, the land they live in. Alternate translation: “the people of Edom.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:1	jdr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns	שְׁמוּעָ֨ה שָׁמַ֜עְנוּ	1	You could translate this “I have heard” to show that Obadiah is speaking as one person among the many in the nations around Edom who have heard Yahweh’s message. Another alternative: “Yahweh our God has told me this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
-1:1	jdr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠צִיר֙ & שֻׁלָּ֔ח	1	You can use the active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have sent a messenger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:1	r27r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠צִיר֙ & שֻׁלָּ֔ח	1	You could specify who sent the messenger. Alternate translation: “Yahweh has sent a messenger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:1	jdr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ק֛וּמוּ וְ⁠נָק֥וּמָה עָלֶי⁠הָ	1	The end of the verse is not spoken by Obadiah himself. Rather, those are the words of Yahweh’s messenger. They can be presented as a quotation with an introductory formula such as “saying,” or as indirect quotation as in UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-1:1	pez6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ק֛וּמוּ	1	This phrase is used to tell people to get ready, in this case to attack Edom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:1	c9e2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠נָק֥וּמָה עָלֶי⁠הָ	1	“Her” refers to the people of Edom. They are being described again by reference to something closely associated with them, their land. Alternate translation: “against the people of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:1	jd1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	לַ⁠מִּלְחָמָֽה	1	You could translate the abstract noun **battle** with a verb. Alternate translation: “to attack her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:2	cc3h			הִנֵּ֥ה קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖י⁠ךָ	1	The addressee changes here. This is no longer the messenger speaking to the other nations. Yahweh is now speaking directly to Edom. To indicate this, you could add a phrase such as “Yahweh says this to the people of Edom”
-1:2	npn6			הִנֵּ֥ה	1	This alerts the people of Edom to pay special attention to what follows. Alternate translation: “Look” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
-1:2	l6dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם בָּז֥וּי אַתָּ֖ה מְאֹֽד	1	These two phrases mean similar things and are used together to emphasize that Edom will lose its important status. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:1	jdr3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לֶ⁠אֱד֗וֹם	1	People are being described here by the name of something closely associated with them, **Edom**, the land that they live in. If this is not clear in your language, you can say clearly that this message is about the people. Alternate translation: “concerning the people of Edom.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:1	jdr5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	שָׁמַ֜עְנוּ	1	Obadiah is speaking as one person among the many in the nations around Edom who have heard Yahweh’s message, including the people of Israel. If your language has an inclusive form for **We**, use that here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:1	c8w8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	שָׁמַ֜עְנוּ	1	Obadiah is speaking to the people of Judah about the people of Edom. So **We** here is inclusive; others in Judah have also heard or are now hearing the message calling the nations to war against Edom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:1	jdr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠צִיר֙ & שֻׁלָּ֔ח	1	If it is more natural in your language, you can use the active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have sent a messenger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:1	r27r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠צִיר֙ & שֻׁלָּ֔ח	1	You could specify who sent the messenger. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh has sent a messenger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:1	jdr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	ק֛וּמוּ וְ⁠נָק֥וּמָה עָלֶי⁠הָ לַ⁠מִּלְחָמָֽה	1	The end of the verse is not spoken by Obadiah himself. Rather, these are the words of Yahweh’s messenger. They can be presented as a quotation with an introductory formula such as “saying,” or as indirect quotation as in UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+1:1	pez6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	ק֛וּמוּ	1	This phrase is used to tell people to get ready, in this case to attack Edom. Alternate translation: “Get ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:1	iaok		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠נָק֥וּמָה עָלֶי⁠הָ	1	This is an idiom that means to violently oppose another person or nation. Alternate translation: “Let us gather our armies against Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:1	c9e2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠נָק֥וּמָה עָלֶי⁠הָ	1	Here, **her** refers to the land of Edom, which, again, stands for the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “Let us rise up against the people of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:1	jd1r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	לַ⁠מִּלְחָמָֽה	1	If it is clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **battle** with a verb. Alternate translation: “to attack her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:2	cc3h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	הִנֵּ֥ה קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖י⁠ךָ	1	The addressee changes here. This is no longer Yahweh speaking to Judah or the messenger speaking to the other nations. Now Yahweh is speaking directly to the people of Edom. If it would be clearer in your language, you could add a quote introduction here, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+1:2	npn6			הִנֵּ֥ה	1	This alerts the people of Edom to pay special attention to what follows. Use a natural way of getting someone’s attention in your language. Alternate translation: “Look” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
+1:2	l6dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם בָּז֥וּי אַתָּ֖ה מְאֹֽד	1	These two phrases mean similar things and are used together to emphasize that Edom will lose its important status. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine them as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 1:2	ec8m		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	קָטֹ֛ן נְתַתִּ֖י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם	1	Something insignificant is spoken of figuratively as if it were small in size and could easily be overlooked. Alternate translation: “insignificant among the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:2	ch1u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	בָּז֥וּי אַתָּ֖ה מְאֹֽד	1	You could state this in the active form. Alternate translation: “the people of other nations will hate you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:3	qpw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לִבְּ⁠ךָ֙	1	Here, the heart is used figuratively to refer to a person’s thoughts and feelings. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:3	kjbt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	זְד֤וֹן לִבְּ⁠ךָ֙ הִשִּׁיאֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	Here, **pride** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could deceive someone. If this is not clear, you could say this with plain language.\nAlternate translation: “Because you are so proud, you have deceived yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:3	hzdk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	זְד֤וֹן לִבְּ⁠ךָ֙ הִשִּׁיאֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	Here, **you** is singular, since it refers to the people of Edom as a single nation, but if this is confusing in your language, you can use a plural form of “you” here and throughout this book. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+1:3	kcc3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	זְד֤וֹן לִבְּ⁠ךָ֙	1	If it is clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **pride** with the adjective “proud.” Alternate translation: “Your proud attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:3	qpw7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	זְד֤וֹן לִבְּ⁠ךָ֙	1	Here, **heart** is used figuratively to refer to a person’s thoughts and feelings.\nAlternate translation: “Your proud attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:3	k9sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	שֹׁכְנִ֥י בְ⁠חַגְוֵי־סֶּ֖לַע	1	Here, the pronoun switches from **you** to **he** even though Yahweh is still talking to the people of Edom. If this is confusing in your language, you can continue to use **you**, since this is part of Yahweh’s continuing message to the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “you who live in the clefts of the rock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1:3	q6sz			בְ⁠חַגְוֵי־סֶּ֖לַע	1	This means a place that is protected because it is surrounded by rocks.
-1:3	k9sw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	מְר֣וֹם שִׁבְתּ֑⁠וֹ	1	This says **his** as if Yahweh were talking aloud about Edom rather than to Edom, but it can be translated with **you** as part of Yahweh’s continuing words to the people. Alternate translation: “you who live in the clefts of the rock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 1:3	r5zj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֹמֵ֣ר בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	This says **he** and **his,** as if Yahweh were talking aloud about Edom rather than to Edom, but it can be translated with **you** as part of Yahweh’s continuing words to the people. Alternate translation: “you who say in your heart” or “you who say to yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1:3	jd3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Here, the heart is used figuratively to refer to a person’s thoughts and feelings. Alternate translation: “say to yourselves” or “think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:3	i2hx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מִ֥י יוֹרִדֵ֖⁠נִי אָֽרֶץ	1	The question form shows how proud the Edomites were and how safe they felt. Alternate translation: “no one can bring me down to the ground” or “I am safe from all attackers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1:4	xn9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אִם־תַּגְבִּ֣יהַּ כַּ⁠נֶּ֔שֶׁר וְ⁠אִם־בֵּ֥ין כּֽוֹכָבִ֖ים שִׂ֣ים קִנֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1	The two expressions have similar meanings. Yahweh is showing that what he is saying is important by saying it more than once in slightly different ways. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1:4	jd5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	אִם־תַּגְבִּ֣יהַּ כַּ⁠נֶּ֔שֶׁר וְ⁠אִם־בֵּ֥ין כּֽוֹכָבִ֖ים שִׂ֣ים קִנֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1	The people of Edom think they are safe because they live up high in the mountains. Yahweh is saying that even if they lived much higher than it is actually possible for humans to live, they would still not be safe. Alternate translation: “and I tell you that even if you had wings and could fly higher than eagles fly, and if you could make your homes among the stars” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-1:4	jd7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	שִׂ֣ים קִנֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1	You could use the active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “if you could make your homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:4	bbu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מִ⁠שָּׁ֥ם אוֹרִֽידְ⁠ךָ֖	1	Yahweh’s response to the Edomites is that there is nowhere they would be safe from his judgment and punishment. Alternate translation: “you would still not be safe there from the attackers that I am sending” This is a spatial metaphor. “Bringing down” means humbling. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:5	w86v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	אִם־גַּנָּבִ֤ים בָּאֽוּ־לְ⁠ךָ֙ אִם־שׁ֣וֹדְדֵי לַ֔יְלָה	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea they are expressing. You could combine them. Alternate translation: “when thieves break into someone’s house during the night and rob them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1:5	b93f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֵ֣יךְ נִדְמֵ֔יתָה	1	You could use the active form of the verb, and you could specify that the attackers the messenger has summoned will ruin Edom. Alternate translation: “but attackers will completely destroy your country” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:5	jd9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אֵ֣יךְ נִדְמֵ֔יתָה	1	Yahweh adds this phrase in the middle of another sentence to express that the punishment of Edom is shocking. You could move the phrase to the end of the verse and make it its own sentence. Alternate translation: “but attackers will completely destroy your country” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-1:5	q1pg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	אִם־גַּנָּבִ֤ים בָּאֽוּ־לְ⁠ךָ֙ אִם־שׁ֣וֹדְדֵי לַ֔יְלָה	1	This is a rhetorical question. The question form is used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they would only steal what they wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1:5	w64v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הֲ⁠ל֥וֹא יִגְנְב֖וּ דַּיָּ֑⁠ם	1	Yahweh is implying that he will despoil Edom worse than thieves do when they plunder a house. You could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they would only steal what they wanted, but I will take everything from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:5	k12c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	אִם־בֹּֽצְרִים֙ בָּ֣אוּ לָ֔⁠ךְ הֲ⁠ל֖וֹא יַשְׁאִ֥ירוּ עֹלֵלֽוֹת	1	Yahweh is implying that he will strip away Edom’s possessions more completely than grape harvesters strip vines. You could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they would leave some grapes, but I will take everything from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1:6	zsf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֵ֚יךְ נֶחְפְּשׂ֣וּ עֵשָׂ֔ו נִבְע֖וּ מַצְפֻּנָֽי⁠ו	1	You could use the active form for both of these passive verbs. Alternate translation: “these attackers will take away everything that is valuable. They will even find and take away the valuable things that you have hidden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:6	jd13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֵ֚יךְ נֶחְפְּשׂ֣וּ עֵשָׂ֔ו נִבְע֖וּ מַצְפֻּנָֽי⁠ו	1	You could state explicitly who will take away Edom’s valuables. Alternate translation: “these attackers will take away everything that is valuable. They will even find and take away the valuable things that you have hidden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:6	m9p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	עֵשָׂ֔ו	1	Here, the name “Esau” refers to the people of Edom. They were the descendants of Esau, who was also known as Edom. All the people of Edom are being portrayed as if they were a single person, their ancestor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:6	lf9t			נֶחְפְּשׂ֣וּ	1	This means the enemies have search through Esau’s things, taken everything valuable, and left everything else in a mess or damaged.
-1:7	cr88			עַֽד־הַ⁠גְּב֣וּל שִׁלְּח֗וּ⁠ךָ	1	Alternate translation: “they will force you to leave your country” However, since it is not specified whose border this is, another interpretation would be that the people of Edom will try to take refuge in the lands of their allies, but they won’t be allowed to.
+1:3	jd3r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֹמֵ֣ר בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ	1	Here, the heart is used figuratively to refer to a person’s thoughts and feelings. Alternate translation: “he who says to himself” or “you who think” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:3	i2hx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	מִ֥י יוֹרִדֵ֖⁠נִי אָֽרֶץ	1	This rhetorical question expresses how proud the Edomites were and how safe they felt. Alternate translation: “no one can bring me down to the ground” or “I am safe from all attackers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1:4	xn9f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	אִם־תַּגְבִּ֣יהַּ כַּ⁠נֶּ֔שֶׁר וְ⁠אִם־בֵּ֥ין כּֽוֹכָבִ֖ים שִׂ֣ים קִנֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1	These two expressions have similar meanings. This is a way of showing that something is important by saying it more than once but in slightly different ways. If this is not clear in your language, use another way of showing that this is important. Alternate translation: “Even if you had wings and could live high up among the eagles, or even up among the stars” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:4	jd5r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	אִם־תַּגְבִּ֣יהַּ כַּ⁠נֶּ֔שֶׁר וְ⁠אִם־בֵּ֥ין כּֽוֹכָבִ֖ים שִׂ֣ים קִנֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1	The people of Edom think that they are safe because they live up high in the mountains. Yahweh is saying that even if they lived much higher than it is actually possible for humans to live, they would still not be safe. Alternate translation: “and I tell you that even if you had wings and could fly higher than eagles fly, and if you could make your homes among the stars” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+1:4	jd7r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	שִׂ֣ים קִנֶּ֑⁠ךָ	1	If your language does not use passive verb forms, you could use the active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “if you could make your homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:4	bbu3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	מִ⁠שָּׁ֥ם אוֹרִֽידְ⁠ךָ֖	1	Here, **bring you down** means “humble you” or “defeat you.” This is a spatial metaphor. Yahweh’s response to the Edomites is that there is nowhere they would be safe from his judgment and punishment. Alternate translation: “you would still not be safe there from the attackers that I am sending” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:4	ce6e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations	נְאֻם־יְהוָֽה	1	This phrase reminds the reader that this message, including the entire book, came directly from Yahweh. Use a form of quotation that would make this clear in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+1:4	fyco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	נְאֻם־יְהוָֽה	1	If it would be more natural in your language, instead of the abstract noun **declaration**, you could use a verb here. Alternate translation: “Yahweh declares this to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:5	w86v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	אִם־גַּנָּבִ֤ים בָּאֽוּ־לְ⁠ךָ֙ אִם־שׁ֣וֹדְדֵי לַ֔יְלָה	1	These two phrases mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the one idea that they are expressing. If this is not clear in your language, use another way of showing that this is important or you could combine them, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1:5	b93f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֵ֣יךְ נִדְמֵ֔יתָה	1	You could use the active form of the verb, and you could specify who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “how the attackers will destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:5	jd9r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אֵ֣יךְ נִדְמֵ֔יתָה	1	Yahweh adds this phrase in the middle of another sentence to express that the punishment of Edom is shocking. Unlike thieves and grape-harvesters, those who attack Edom will leave nothing behind. If it would be clearer in your language, you could move the phrase to the end of the verse and make it its own sentence. Alternate translation: “But attackers will destroy you completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+1:5	q1pg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠ל֥וֹא יִגְנְב֖וּ דַּיָּ֑⁠ם	1	This is a rhetorical question. The question form is used to make a point strongly. If you do not use rhetorical questions in this way in your language, you can use a statement here. Alternate translation: “they would only steal what they wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1:5	k12c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	אִם־בֹּֽצְרִים֙ בָּ֣אוּ לָ֔⁠ךְ הֲ⁠ל֖וֹא יַשְׁאִ֥ירוּ עֹלֵלֽוֹת	1	This is a rhetorical question. The question form is used to make a point strongly. If you do not use rhetorical questions in this way in your language, you can use a statement here. Alternate translation: “they would certainly leave some grapes behind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1:6	gpm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	אֵ֚יךְ	1	Here, **How** introduces an exclamation to express amazement that the pillaging of Edom is so extreme. Use a natural way in your language to express this. Alternate translation: “In an extreme way” or “Completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+1:6	zsf7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	אֵ֚יךְ נֶחְפְּשׂ֣וּ עֵשָׂ֔ו	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the active form of this verb, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “How the attackers will ransack the country of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:6	m9p3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	עֵשָׂ֔ו	1	Here, the name **Esau** refers to the people of Edom. They were the descendants of Esau, who was also known as Edom. All the people of Edom are being portrayed as if they were a single person, their ancestor. If this is confusing in your language, you can refer to the people instead, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:6	lf9t			נֶחְפְּשׂ֣וּ	1	Here, **ransacked** means that the enemies have searched through the people’s things, taken everything valuable, and left everything else in a mess or damaged.
+1:6	w96y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	נִבְע֖וּ מַצְפֻּנָֽי⁠ו	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use the active form of this verb, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “They will search out all of his hidden treasures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:7	yobe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	עַֽד־הַ⁠גְּב֣וּל שִׁלְּח֗וּ⁠ךָ כֹּ֚ל אַנְשֵׁ֣י בְרִיתֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	If it does not make sense in your language to say that someone would be attacked by someone with whom they have a **covenant**, that is, an ally, then you can add in the missing step of their betrayal, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:7	n3t6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd	בְרִיתֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	Yahweh is still addressing the people of Edom here, so the word **your** refers to them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+1:7	cr88			עַֽד־הַ⁠גְּב֣וּל שִׁלְּח֗וּ⁠ךָ	1	There are two possibilities for what **the border** could refer to. (1) It could refer to the border of the country of Edom. Alternate translation: “will force you out of your country” or (2) it could refer to the border of a formerly friendly country. Alternate translation: “will reject you from taking refuge in their country”
 1:7	a612		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	כֹּ֚ל אַנְשֵׁ֣י בְרִיתֶ֔⁠ךָ & אַנְשֵׁ֣י שְׁלֹמֶ֑⁠ךָ לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֗	1	All three phrases refer to Edom’s allies. Yahweh is showing that what he is saying is important by saying it more than once in similar ways. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1:7	n3t6			בְרִיתֶ֔⁠ךָ	1	The word “your” refers to the nation of Edom.
-1:7	jd15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֗ יָשִׂ֤ימוּ מָזוֹר֙ תַּחְתֶּ֔י⁠ךָ	1	Hebrew says simply “your bread.” Hearers and readers are expected to understand the meaning and supply the missing words in their minds. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-1:7	rc1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	אֵ֥ין תְּבוּנָ֖ה בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	Yahweh could be saying this as an aside about the people of Edom, rather than speaking to them. (See: Aside) Alternately, the former allies could be saying this about Edom. Alternate translation: “then they will say to you, ‘you are not as clever as you thought you were’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:7	jd17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	תְּבוּנָ֖ה	1	You could translate the abstract noun “understanding” with a verb. Alternate translation: “they will say to you, ‘you are not as clever as you thought you were’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:7	jd19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	That is, Edom. All the people are being portrayed as if they were a single person, their ancestor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:8	i4rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠ל֛וֹא בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠ה֖וּא נְאֻם־יְהוָ֑ה וְ⁠הַאֲבַדְתִּ֤י חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽ⁠אֱד֔וֹם וּ⁠תְבוּנָ֖ה מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו	1	This is a rhetorical question. Yahweh uses the question form to emphasize that Edom’s destruction is certain. Alternate translation: “‘on that day,’ says Yahweh, ‘I will certainly destroy …’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-1:8	jd21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	חֲכָמִים֙	1	The original audience would have known that Edom was famous for its wisdom. However, when Edom is destroyed, it will become clear that its people were not wise to think they were safe because they lived on rugged cliffs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:8	jd23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠תְבוּנָ֖ה	1	You could translate this abstract noun with a verb by saying, for example, “no one will know what to do any more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:8	z8tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו	1	Most of the land of Esau was mountainous, so this is one way of referring to the land of Edom. This was one of the mountains in Edom. It is sometimes identified with Mount Bozrah. Yahweh is referring to the whole territory by the name of one prominent part of it. Alternate translation: “the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:9	jd25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe	וְ⁠חַתּ֥וּ גִבּוֹרֶ֖י⁠ךָ תֵּימָ֑ן	1	Yahweh stops speaking to the people of Edom and addresses a region of the country, even though it cannot understand him. This shows that Yahweh feels very strongly about what he is saying. (See Apostrophe) Alternate translation: “the soldiers in the army of Edom will become terrified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
-1:9	qvg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	תֵּימָ֑ן	1	Teman is the name of a region in the land of Edom. Yahweh is referring to the whole territory of Edom by the name of one part of it. Alternate translation: “the soldiers in the army of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:9	ljv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	לְמַ֧עַן	1	There is a cause-and-effect relationship here. The soldiers in the army of Edom will become “dismayed,” that is, they will give up and stop fighting. This will leave everyone else defenseless, and so they will all be destroyed. Alternate translation: “when your army stops fighting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
-1:9	jd27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	יִכָּֽרֶת־אִ֛ישׁ	1	**Cut off** here is a metaphor for being killed. The Edomites aren’t actually part of the mountain, but they live there, so it’s as if something is being cut off or taken away from the mountain. Alternate translation: “your enemies will completely destroy all you people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:9	q6s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יִכָּֽרֶת	1	You could use an active verb form, and you could specify who will do the action. Alternate translation: “your enemies will … destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:9	jd31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	אִ֛ישׁ	1	Hebrew **man** means “every person” here. Alternate translation: “all you people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1:9	jd33			אִ֛ישׁ	1	Yahweh says in v. 8 that he will destroy the wise men in Edom, and here in v. 9 that the mighty men will be “dismayed” (that is, they will give up trying to fight). The implication is that no one else will escape the invading armies either. Yahweh is basically challenging everyone in Edom by asking, “If the ones you would count on most to rescue you, the wise and the strong, will be destroyed by these attackers, how can anyone else think they will survive?” You can use similar words in verse 8 and 9 to show how this argument develops over these two verses.
-1:9	jd35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָׂ֖ו	1	As in v. 8, Yahweh is referring to the whole territory by the name of this one part of it. Alternate translation: “who live the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:9	jd37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	מִ⁠קָּֽטֶל	1	The abstract noun **slaughter** intensifies the idea of being “cut off” or killed. You could use an adverb to translate it. Alternate translation: “completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:10	jd39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אָחִ֥י⁠ךָ	1	The term **brother** is being used here to refer to members of a related people group. Alternate translation: “your relatives who are the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:7	jd15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	לַחְמְ⁠ךָ֗ יָשִׂ֤ימוּ מָזוֹר֙ תַּחְתֶּ֔י⁠ךָ	1	Hebrew says simply **your bread**. In this poetic style, hearers and readers are expected to understand the meaning and supply the missing words **The men of** from the previous two lines. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:7	rc1i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside	אֵ֥ין תְּבוּנָ֖ה בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	There are four possibilities for the meaning of this phrase. (1) Yahweh could be saying this as an aside in order to express his evaluation of the people of Edom. If this would be confusing in your language, you can continue the address to Edom in the second person, as in the UST. (2) the former allies could be saying this about Edom. Alternate translation: “Then they will say to you, ‘you are not as clever as you thought you were’” (3) It could be referring to the trap just mentioned. Alternate translation: “and there is no perception of it” (4) It could be referring to the shocking situation of Edom being betrayed by its allies. Alternate translation: “There is no understanding of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
+1:7	jd17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	אֵ֥ין תְּבוּנָ֖ה בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	You could translate the abstract noun “understanding” with a verb. Alternate translation: “He does not understand anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:7	jd19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	בּֽ⁠וֹ	1	Here, **him** probably refers to Edom, which represents the people who live there. Alternate translation: “in the people of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:8	i4rg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠ל֛וֹא בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠ה֖וּא & וְ⁠הַאֲבַדְתִּ֤י חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽ⁠אֱד֔וֹם	1	This is a rhetorical question. Yahweh uses the question form here to emphasize that he will certainly do this. Alternate translation: “On that day…I will certainly destroy the wise men from Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1:8	jd21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠הַאֲבַדְתִּ֤י חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽ⁠אֱד֔וֹם	1	The original audience would have known that Edom was famous for its wisdom. So this means that even their famous wisdom cannot save them from Yahweh’s destruction. If it would be clearer, you could indicate this information as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:8	i6ry		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	וּ⁠תְבוּנָ֖ה מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו	1	This is the second part of the rhetorical question. You could also start a new sentence here. Yahweh continues the question form here to emphasize that he will certainly do this. Alternate translation: “and I will certainly destroy their understanding” or “On that day I will certainly remove understanding from the mountain of Esau” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+1:8	mupa		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וּ⁠תְבוּנָ֖ה מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו	1	In this poetic style, the reader is expected to use the words **will I not on that day destroy** from the first rhetorical question in order to understand this second one. If that is not clear in your language, you can repeat those words here. Alternate translation: “and will I not on that day destroy understanding from the mountain of Esau?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:8	g6se		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	חֲכָמִים֙ מֵֽ⁠אֱד֔וֹם וּ⁠תְבוּנָ֖ה מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו	1	In this poetic style, the same meaning is expressed twice but in different words in order to emphasize what is being said. Here, **wise men** and **understanding** both refer to people who are wise, and **Edom** and **the mountain of Esau** are both ways of referring to the country of Edom. If this is confusing in your language, you could say this only once, or emphasize the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “all people who are wise from the country of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:8	jd23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠תְבוּנָ֖ה	1	You could translate this abstract noun with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “and people who know what to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:8	z8tf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָֽׂו	1	Yahweh is referring to the whole territory of Edom by using the name of one prominent part of it. The **mountain of Esau** may be the one now called Mount Bozrah. Alternate translation: “from the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:8	gn3t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עֵשָֽׂו	1	This is the name of the man who was the ancestor of the people of Edom. See how you translated this in [verse 6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1:9	jd25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וְ⁠חַתּ֥וּ גִבּוֹרֶ֖י⁠ךָ תֵּימָ֑ן	1	Yahweh continues speaking to the people of Edom, but now he addresses them as **Teman**, which was the name of the region around their capital city. This part of Edom is now being used to represent the whole people. Alternate translation: “People of Edom, your strong soldiers will become terrified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:9	qvg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	תֵּימָ֑ן	1	Teman is the name of a region in the land of Edom. Yahweh is referring to the whole territory of Edom by the name of one part of it. Alternate translation: “O people of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1:9	ljv4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	לְמַ֧עַן	1	There is a cause-and-effect relationship here. Yahweh says in v. 8 that he will destroy the wise men in Edom, and here in v. 9 that the mighty men of Edom will be “dismayed” (that is, they will give up trying to fight). The people of Edom trusted in these two groups to protect them. So as a result of Yahweh destroying these two groups, no others in Edom will escape the invading armies, either. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1:9	jd27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	יִכָּֽרֶת־אִ֛ישׁ	1	Here, **cut off** is a metaphor for being killed. The Edomites are pictured as part of the mountain where they live, and their death as being cut off from the mountain. Alternate translation: “your enemies will destroy all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:9	q6s7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יִכָּֽרֶת־אִ֛ישׁ	1	You could use an active verb form, and you could specify who will do the action. Alternate translation: “your enemies will destroy all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:9	jd31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אִ֛ישׁ	1	Here, **a man** is an idiom that means “each person.” Alternate translation: “all you people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:9	jd35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	מֵ⁠הַ֥ר עֵשָׂ֖ו	1	As in v. 8, Yahweh is referring to the whole territory by the name of this one part of it. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “from the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:9	jd37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	מִ⁠קָּֽטֶל	1	The abstract noun **slaughter** intensifies the idea of being **cut off** or killed. If you would not use an abstract noun like this in your language, you could use an adverb instead. Alternate translation: “violently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:9	hsy2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	מִ⁠קָּֽטֶל	1	Some Bible translations put this phrase with verse 10, rather than with verse 9. If you choose to do that, verse 9 would end, “…from the mountain of Esau.” Verse 10 would begin, “Because of slaughter, because of violence…”\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:10	jd39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אָחִ֥י⁠ךָ	1	The term **brother** is being used here to refer to members of a related people group. Use the term that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “your relatives who are the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1:10	ui6g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	יַעֲקֹ֖ב	1	Here the name **Jacob** refers to the people of Judah, who were his descendants. All the people are being portrayed as if they were a single person, their ancestor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:10	jd41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	תְּכַסְּ⁠ךָ֣ בוּשָׁ֑ה	1	You could use a verb to translate the abstract noun **shame** and **you** could do the action instead of receiving it. Alternate translation: “you will feel ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:10	jd41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	תְּכַסְּ⁠ךָ֣ בוּשָׁ֑ה	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a verb to translate the abstract noun **shame**. Alternate translation: “you will be dishonored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:10	f8g6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	תְּכַסְּ⁠ךָ֣ בוּשָׁ֑ה	1	To be **covered** with something is an idiom for fully experiencing it. Alternate translation: “you will be completely ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:10	a113		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖תָּ לְ⁠עוֹלָֽם	1	You could use an active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “your enemies will destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:10	a113		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖תָּ	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “your enemies will destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:10	jd43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖תָּ	1	You can specify who will do the action. Alternate translation: “your enemies will destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:10	jd45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖תָּ	1	As in v. 5, this is an idiom for being destroyed. Alternate translation: “destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:11	w6hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	עֲמָֽדְ⁠ךָ֣ מִ⁠נֶּ֔גֶד	1	This is a metaphor that gives the picture of a person just standing around and not helping. It figuratively means “did not help him.” You could say that as an Alternate Translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:11	s38y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	שְׁב֥וֹת זָרִ֖ים חֵיל֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠נָכְרִ֞ים בָּ֣אוּ שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that Judah was in a desperate situation. Invading armies were plundering Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1:11	rtj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	חֵיל֑⁠וֹ & שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	**His** refers to **your brother Jacob** in verse 10, meaning the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:11	jd46			חֵיל֑⁠וֹ	1	In this context, this Hebrew term could either mean **wealth** or **army**
-1:11	jd47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	**Gates** means “city.” The gates, the first part of a city that you would come to, are being used to represent the whole city. Alternate translation: “all the cities of Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:11	i8sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עַל־יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ יַדּ֣וּ גוֹרָ֔ל	1	This is a figurative way of saying that when all the cities of Judah were conquered, Jerusalem was the big prize. If something is so special that everybody wants to have it and you can’t divide it up, you cast lots for it. Alternate translation: “they even plundered Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:11	s4y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	גַּם־אַתָּ֖ה כְּ⁠אַחַ֥ד מֵ⁠הֶֽם	1	Alternate translation: “you were just as bad as those foreigners, because you did nothing to help.” The people of Edom did not do exactly the same things as the “strangers” and “foreigners” did. You could use the alternate translation to explain how the people of Edom were still “like” them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:12	jd51			וְ⁠אַל	1	This phrase is used eight times in verses 12–14. It introduces a statement about how people should generally behave. But in these verses, the statements apply specifically to what the people of Edom have just done to the people of Judah. So an alternate translation in every case would be, “you should not have” (For example, you could change “you should not rejoice” to “you should not have rejoiced.”)
-1:12	crs1			וְ⁠אַל	1	Yahweh uses a repetitive series of sentences to show how badly the people of Edom have treated the people of Judah. A repetitive series is called a “litany.” This is a list of the charges against the people of Edom. Yahweh goes on to say in verses 15 and 16 that he has found them guilty of all these charges and will punish them. (See: Litany)
-1:12	e7cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אַל־תֵּ֤רֶא	1	The Hebrew expression **see** is an idiom here for “enjoy looking at.” Alternate translation: “you should not have gloated over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:12	crs3			בְ⁠יוֹם	1	This expression refers to a specific time when God punishes people for their sin.
-1:12	q8md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	As in v. 10, Yahweh describes the people of Judah as a **brother** to the descendants of Esau because Jacob was the brother of Esau (Edom). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:12	b6h1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	בְּ⁠י֣וֹם נָכְר֔⁠וֹ	1	As in v. 10, Yahweh describes the people of Judah as a **brother** to the descendants of Esau because Jacob was the brother of Esau (Edom). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:12	f7lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	לִ⁠בְנֵֽי־יְהוּדָ֖ה	1	Here, the word **sons** does not refer only to men. It means all the descendants of Jacob’s son Judah, and more broadly all the Israelites from a number of different tribes who had come to live in the kingdom of Judah at this time. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-1:12	lxg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אַל־תַּגְדֵּ֥ל פִּ֖י⁠ךָ	1	This is an idiom for bragging. Alternate translation: “you should not have boasted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:13	wg54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	אֵידָ֔⁠ם & אֵיד֑⁠וֹ & אֵידֽ⁠וֹ	1	The Hebrew text says **their** in the first case, meaning the Judeans, and **his** in the second and third cases, meaning “your brother Judah.” But since that is a personification of the Judeans (see v. 10), you can say “their” in every case. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-1:13	crs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אַל־תֵּ֧רֶא	1	The Hebrew expression **see** is an idiom here for **enjoy looking at.** Alternate translation: “you should not have gloated over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:13	f9q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	גַם־אַתָּ֛ה	1	Yahweh accuses the people of Edom emphatically, likely in anger, and perhaps also to warn them not to claim to be innocent. You could make this a separate short sentence ending in an exclamation mark. Alternate translation: “Yes, you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
-1:13	jz38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁלַ֥חְנָה בְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ	1	Here, the Hebrew has only the word **you,** but it is feminine and plural. So you should add something to show that it means “you women,” unless your language already marks the word “you” for gender and number. Alternate translation: “You women should not have taken away their valuable possessions.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-1:14	ixs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠פֶּ֔רֶק	1	This means a place where two roads come together. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-1:14	p7i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הַכְרִ֖ית אֶת־פְּלִיטָ֑י⁠ו	1	This is a metaphor that means **killed.** It is likely a comparison to the way grain is cut down at harvest time. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:14	qdx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠אַל־תַּסְגֵּ֥ר שְׂרִידָ֖י⁠ו	1	You can make explicit who the Edomites delivered the Judean survivors to. Alternate translation: “you should not have captured the survivors and turned them over to their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:15	fa9m			כִּֽי־קָר֥וֹב יוֹם־יְהוָ֖ה עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר עָשִׂ֨יתָ֙ יֵעָ֣שֶׂה לָּ֔⁠ךְ גְּמֻלְ⁠ךָ֖ יָשׁ֥וּב בְּ⁠רֹאשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ	1	Bible experts are not certain whether verse 15 goes with verse 14 as the end of the previous section or if it goes with verse 16 as the beginning of the new section.
-1:15	e5t7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	כִּֽי־קָר֥וֹב יוֹם־יְהוָ֖ה עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם	1	Yahweh is giving the people of Edom the reason why they should have helped the Israelites instead of joining in attacking them. It is because Yahweh will soon judge all nations for the way they have treated others. You can make this explicit: “You should have helped others because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-1:15	crs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יוֹם־יְהוָ֖ה	1	This expression refers to a specific time when God punishes people for their sin. You can say explicitly that this is what Yahweh will do on that **day.** Alternate translation: “the time … when I, Yahweh, will judge and punish all the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-1:15	crs9			קָר֥וֹב & עַל	1	In this context, the expression means **near in time** Alternate translation: “coming soon”
-1:15	rd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר עָשִׂ֨יתָ֙ יֵעָ֣שֶׂה לָּ֔⁠ךְ	1	You can specify who will do the action. **I** means **I, Yahweh**as in the previous sentence. You can also specify the reference of **you** Alternate translation: “I will do the same things to you people of Edom that you did to others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:15	cr1s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יֵעָ֣שֶׂה לָּ֔⁠ךְ	1	You can use the active form of the verb. Alternate translation: “I will do the same things to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-1:15	djk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	גְּמֻלְ⁠ךָ֖ יָשׁ֥וּב	1	This is a metaphor that means **the same things will happen to you** You could use that as an alternate translation. It’s as if the Edomites have sent bad things out to others, but those things are now going to come back and hurt them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:15	cr3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	בְּ⁠רֹאשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ	1	The **head** is being used to represent the whole person. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:16	nf6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ֗י כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	As in verse 15, Yahweh is giving the people of Edom the reason why they should have helped the Israelites instead of joining in attacking them. It’s because Yahweh will soon judge all nations for the way they have treated others. You can make this explicit: “You should have helped others because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:16	cr5s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙ עַל־הַ֣ר קָדְשִׁ֔⁠י	1	1. One possibility is that Yahweh is saying he has brought the people of Edom into court at Jerusalem, which is the place where he reigns, and found them guilty and punished them there. As noted earlier, Yahweh may be using the past tense to refer to something that will happen in the future. So an alternate translation would be, “I am going to punish you in the holy place where I reign” 2. Another possibility is that this is referring to how the people of Judah suffered punishment when Jerusalem was destroyed. Alternate translation: “I punished you when Jerusalem was destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1:16	fu2y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture	כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	1. Here, Yahweh may be using the past tense to refer to something that will happen in the future. In that case, this would be a reference to what Yahweh says in the previous verse, that the time is coming soon when he will judge and punish all the nations. Alternate translation: “I am going to punish you” 2. Another possibility is that Yahweh is saying that Edom literally did drink to celebrate the defeat of the people of Judah, but they and the other nations will figuratively **drink** (be punished) in the future. No alternate translation would be needed for this second possible interpretation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
-1:16	cr7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	Drinking (often in the Old Testament “drinking a cup”) can be a metaphor for being punished. Alternate translation: “I will punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:16	cr9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	**You** is plural. 1. It may mean **you people of Edom** If so, this would be a continuation of what Yahweh tells them in v. 15, that he will do the same things to them that they did to others. Alternate translation: “I will punish you people of Edom” 2. The plural could also be referring to all the other nations. Alternate translation: “I will punish you other nations” 3. This could also be referring to the people of Judah, who figuratively “drank the cup of punishment” when Jerusalem was destroyed. Alternate translation: “I punished you people of Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-1:16	cr11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	You can show that the people of Edom are not doing this by themselves by specifying that Yahweh is doing it to them. Alternate translation: “I will … punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:16	ujj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ֣ר קָדְשִׁ֔⁠י	1	This means **on Mount Zion** and therefore **in Jerusalem.** Jerusalem is being referred to by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:16	qz7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	יִשְׁתּ֥וּ כָֽל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֖ם תָּמִ֑יד	1	Here once again **drink** is a metaphor for **punishment.** Alternate translation: “I will punish them severely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:16	a8v3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠שָׁת֣וּ וְ⁠לָע֔וּ וְ⁠הָי֖וּ כְּ⁠ל֥וֹא הָיֽוּ	1	These two words mean something similar and are used together to intensify the meaning. Alternate translation: “I will punish them severely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1:17	cc36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַ֥ר צִיּ֛וֹן תִּהְיֶ֥ה פְלֵיטָ֖ה	1	The abstract noun **remnant** refers to the people who will still be alive in Jerusalem after Yahweh has finished punishing the other nations. As [1:16](../01/16.md) says, those other nations will disappear completely, but the descendants of Jacob will continue as a people. Alternate translation: “some people in Jerusalem will escape” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-1:17	y9pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הָ֣יָה קֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	This is a figure of speech that refers to Jerusalem by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. Alternate translation: “in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:17	b4sh			וְ⁠הָ֣יָה קֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	The word **it** refers to **the mountain of Zion.** Alternate translation: “Jerusalem will be a holy place”
-1:17	cr13			וְ⁠יָֽרְשׁוּ֙ בֵּ֣ית יַֽעֲקֹ֔ב אֵ֖ת מוֹרָֽשֵׁי⁠הֶם	1	**Possessions** is plural because it refers to each of the Israelite families and clans occupying the lands that were supposed to be passed down to them from generation to generation. But since it refers overall to the land that belongs to all of the descendants of Jacob, you can translate it with a singular word if that is clearer. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Jacob will each possess the land that belongs to them”
-1:18	rm2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וְ⁠הָיָה֩ בֵית־יַעֲקֹ֨ב אֵ֜שׁ וּ⁠בֵ֧ית יוֹסֵ֣ף לֶהָבָ֗ה	1	The two expressions have similar meanings. Yahweh is showing that what he is saying is important by saying it more than once. However, the actual descendants of Joseph had been taken into exile by Assyria long before this, so they were not really present at this time. Since both expressions refer to all of the Israelites, you could say as an alternative, “The Israelites will be like a fire. Yes, they will be like a flame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-1:18	cr15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בֵית־יַעֲקֹ֨ב	1	Here, the word **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. All of the descendants of Jacob are being described figuratively as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:10	jd45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖תָּ	1	As in [verse 5](../01/05.md), **cut off** is an idiom for being destroyed. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “your enemies will destroy you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:11	w6hj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	עֲמָֽדְ⁠ךָ֣ מִ⁠נֶּ֔גֶד	1	This is a metaphor that pictures the people of Edom as a person who was just standing around and not helping a relative. Alternate translation: “you did not help him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:11	s38y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	שְׁב֥וֹת זָרִ֖ים חֵיל֑⁠וֹ וְ⁠נָכְרִ֞ים בָּ֣אוּ שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to emphasize that Judah was in a desperate situation. Invading armies were plundering the cities of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:11	rtj8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	חֵיל֑⁠וֹ & שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	Here, **his** refers to **your brother Jacob** in [verse 10](../01/10.md), meaning the people of Judah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:11	jd46			חֵיל֑⁠וֹ	1	In this context, the term translated **wealth** could also mean “army.” But since it clearly means “wealth” in [verse 13](../01/13.md), it seems best to translate it as “wealth” here, as well.
+1:11	jd47		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	שְׁעָרָ֗יו	1	Here, **gates** stands for “city.” The gates, the part of a city through which people would come and go, are being used to represent the whole city. Alternate translation: “all the cities of Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:11	i8sr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠עַל־יְרוּשָׁלִַ֨ם֙ יַדּ֣וּ גוֹרָ֔ל	1	There are two possibilities for the meaning here. (1) This is a figurative way of saying that the **foreigners** had complete control of **Jerusalem**, with Jerusalem pictured as something that everybody wants to have, but it cannot be divided, so they cast lots to see who will get it. Alternate translation: “they even plundered Jerusalem” or (2) The name of the city may be standing for the wealth of the city. Alternate translation: “and they divided the wealth of Jerusalem among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:11	s4y1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	גַּם־אַתָּ֖ה כְּ⁠אַחַ֥ד מֵ⁠הֶֽם	1	The people of Edom did not do exactly the same things as the **strangers** and **foreigners** did, but they were like them because they did not help the people of Judah, who were a related people group. If it would be clearer in your language, you could include this information, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:12	crs1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany	וְ⁠אַל & וְ⁠אַל & וְ⁠אַל	1	Yahweh uses a repetitive series of sentences in verses 12–14 to show how badly the people of Edom have treated the people of Judah. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the charges against the people of Edom. Yahweh goes on to say in verses 15 and 16 that he has found them guilty of all of these charges and that he will punish them. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
+1:12	e7cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠אַל־תֵּ֤רֶא	1	Here, **you should not have looked** implies that the people of Edom were looking on the disaster in Judah with pleasure. To make this clear, you can include this information in the way that you translate. Alternate translation: “you should not have enjoyed looking” or “it was very bad that you enjoyed looking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:12	xhd0		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	בְ⁠יוֹם־אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠י֣וֹם נָכְר֔⁠וֹ	1	The two phrases **on the day of your brother** and **on the day of his misfortune** work together to mean “on the day of your brother’s misfortune.” If having the two phrases is confusing, you can combine them into one phrase, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+1:12	crs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בְ⁠יוֹם	1	Here, **on the day** is an idiom that refers to an undefined period of time that could extend from one to very many days. Alternate translation: “at the time of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:12	q8md		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙	1	As in [verse 10](../01/10.md), Yahweh describes the people of Judah as a **brother** to the descendants of Esau, because their ancestor, Jacob, was the brother of Esau (Edom). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:12	f7lt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations	לִ⁠בְנֵֽי־יְהוּדָ֖ה	1	Here, the word **sons** does not refer only to men. It refers to all of the descendants of Jacob’s son Judah, and more broadly to all of the Israelites from a number of the different tribes of Israel who had come to live in the kingdom of Judah at this time. Alternate translation: “over the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+1:12	lxg7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	וְ⁠אַל־תַּגְדֵּ֥ל פִּ֖י⁠ךָ	1	This is an idiom for bragging or mocking. In this context of observing someone else’s misfortune, mocking makes better sense. Alternate translation: “You should not have mocked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:13	dwn2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֵידָ֔⁠ם & בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֵיד֑⁠וֹ & בְּ⁠י֥וֹם אֵידֽ⁠וֹ	1	In this poetic style, the same phrase is used at the end of each line to emphasize how terrible the **calamity** was. If this style does not work in your language to communicate an increased emphasis, then you could combine the three occurrences into one and communicate that this was a very bad thing in another way, as in the UST.\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:13	wg54		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	אֵידָ֔⁠ם & אֵיד֑⁠וֹ & אֵידֽ⁠וֹ	1	In the first line of this verse, **their** refers to **my people**. In the second and third lines, God’s people are once again pictured as their ancestor Jacob, and so the singular pronoun **his** is used (see [verse 10](../01/10.md)). If this change is confusing in your language, you can avoid the personification and refer to the people with plural pronouns in all three lines. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:13	f9q3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations	גַם־אַתָּ֛ה	1	Yahweh is accusing the people of Edom directly, and he adds this exclamation to emphasize this. This exclamation expresses anger, demands their attention, and also may be a warning that they cannot claim to be innocent. If it is confusing to have this in the middle of another sentence, you could make this a separate sentence ending in an exclamation mark, either before or after the current sentence. Alternate translation: “I am talking to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
+1:13	crs5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	אַל־תֵּ֧רֶא	1	In this context, **looked on** is an idiom for “enjoyed looking at.” See how you translated this in [verse 12](../01/12.md). Alternate translation: “you should not have gloated” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:13	jz38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁלַ֥חְנָה בְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ	1	Here, the word translated as **you** is feminine and plural. In the rest of Obadiah, it is masculine and singular. It may be that God is addressing the women specifically here in case they thought that they were not also guilty. So use a feminine plural form here, or mark this in some other way so that it means “you women.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+1:14	ixs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	הַ⁠פֶּ֔רֶק	1	A **crossroads** is a place where two roads come together. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1:14	p7i1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠הַכְרִ֖ית	1	Here, **to cut down** is a metaphor that means “to kill.” It is likely a comparison to the way grain is cut down at harvest time. See how you translated this same metaphor in [verse 9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:14	qdx9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠אַל־תַּסְגֵּ֥ר שְׂרִידָ֖י⁠ו	1	If it would be clearer in your language, you can make explicit to whom the Edomites delivered the Judean survivors. Alternate translation: “You should not have captured the survivors and delivered them over to the enemy soldiers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:15	fa9m			כִּֽי־קָר֥וֹב יוֹם־יְהוָ֖ה עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר עָשִׂ֨יתָ֙ יֵעָ֣שֶׂה לָּ֔⁠ךְ גְּמֻלְ⁠ךָ֖ יָשׁ֥וּב בְּ⁠רֹאשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ	1	Bible experts are not certain whether verse 15 goes with verse 14 as the end of the previous section or if it goes with verse 16 as the beginning of the new section. Many Bibles put a section break and a heading before verse 15, such as “God Will Judge the Nations.”
+1:15	e5t7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּֽי־קָר֥וֹב יוֹם־יְהוָ֖ה עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֑ם	1	Here Yahweh is giving the people of Edom the reason why they should not have done all of the bad things that they did to the Israelites that were listed in verses 11-14, and instead of that, helped them. It is because Yahweh will soon judge all nations for the way that they have treated others. If it would be clearer in your language, you can make this explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:15	crs7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	יוֹם־יְהוָ֖ה	1	The **day of Yahweh** is an expression that refers to a specific time when God punishes people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when I, Yahweh, will judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:15	crs9			קָר֥וֹב	1	In this context, **near** means “close in time.” Alternate translation: “will soon happen”
+1:15	rd8g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	יֵעָ֣שֶׂה לָּ֔⁠ךְ	1	If you prefer an active verb you can use one here and you can specify who will do this action. Alternate translation: “I will do those same things to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+1:15	djk9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	גְּמֻלְ⁠ךָ֖ יָשׁ֥וּב בְּ⁠רֹאשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ	1	This is a metaphor that pictures the Edomites as having sent bad things out to others, and now those things are going to come back and hurt them as they land on their heads. Alternate translation: “those same things will soon happen to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:15	cr3s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	בְּ⁠רֹאשֶֽׁ⁠ךָ	1	The **head** is being used to represent the whole person. Alternate translation: “to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:16	nf6s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ֗י כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	As at the beginning of verse 15, here also the connecting word **For** indicates that this is a reason why the people of Edom should have helped the Israelites instead of joining in attacking them. Here also Yahweh describes how he will soon judge all nations for the way that they have treated others. There are two possibilities for how you can make this explicit, if that would be clearer in your language. Choosing between these possibilities depends on how you interpret the referent of the word **you**. The word **you** here is masculine plural, the first and only time it occurs in this form in the book. Throughout the book, the nation of Edom was addressed with the masculine singular form. This is also the last occurrence of the second person in the book. (1) Because of these observations, the use of drinking here and throughout the Bible as a metaphor for suffering punishment, and the location of this suffering on Mount Zion in Jerusalem, it seems that here Obadiah stops addressing the people of Edom and returns to addressing the people of Israel. At the beginning of the book, Obadiah included the people of Israel when he said, “We have heard a report from Yahweh.” Now, near the end of the book, he addresses them again, giving them assurance that the people of Edom will be punished for what they did to the people of Israel. See the UST. (2) This word **you** could refer to the people of Edom. Alternate translation: “You should have helped the people of Israel, because just as you drank” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:16	cr9s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns	כַּֽ⁠אֲשֶׁ֤ר שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	Throughout the book of Obadiah, the nation of Edom is addressed with a masculine singular form of “you.” (The one feminine plural form in [verse 13](../01/13.md) only addresses the women of Edom). Here, however, **you** is masculine plural. There are two possibilities for who is being addressed here. (1) It refers to the people of Israel. This would explain the shift from singular to plural. Just as Obadiah addressed the people of Israel in the plural in [verse 1](../01/01.md), so he addresses them in the plural now. This interpretation also fits with the metaphor used here and throughout the Bible that pictures suffering and divine punishment as drinking something that makes a person stagger, fall, and die. The people of Israel suffered and died in Jerusalem when the city was destroyed. This also allows the comparison in this verse to fit with the idea in the previous verse that Edom will suffer in the same way that they made Israel to suffer. See the UST. (2) It refers to the people of Edom. In this case, the comparison is between how the people of Edom literally drank wine in celebration of Jerusalem’s destruction with how the nations will metaphorically drink God’s punishment. Either that, or the verb must be forced into a future meaning, and the comparison is between how God will punish the people of Edom in Jerusalem and how God will punish all the nations. Alternate translation: “just as I will punish you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1:16	cr7s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	שְׁתִיתֶם֙	1	The image of drinking something is often used in the Bible as a metaphor for suffering or for being punished by God. Alternate translation: “you suffered” or “I punished you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:16	ujj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	עַל־הַ֣ר קָדְשִׁ֔⁠י	1	The **mountain of my holiness** refers to Mount Zion and therefore to the city of Jerusalem. So here Jerusalem is being referred to by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. Alternate translation: “in my holy city, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:16	qz7p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	יִשְׁתּ֥וּ כָֽל־הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֖ם תָּמִ֑יד	1	Here the metaphor continues, using **drink** to mean “suffer” or “be punished.” Alternate translation: “I will punish all of the nations continually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:16	a8v3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠שָׁת֣וּ וְ⁠לָע֔וּ	1	The words translated **drink** and **swallow** mean very similar things and are used together to intensify the one meaning. If your language does not have two such similar words, you can use one of the words and intensify the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “They will drink all of it down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1:16	vcve		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	וְ⁠שָׁת֣וּ וְ⁠לָע֔וּ	1	Here the metaphor continues, using **drink** and **swallow** as images for suffering or being punished. Alternate translation: “I will make them suffer a lot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:17	cc36		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַ֥ר צִיּ֛וֹן תִּהְיֶ֥ה פְלֵיטָ֖ה	1	The abstract noun **escape** refers to the people of Israel who will still be alive in Jerusalem after Yahweh has finished punishing the other nations. As [1:16](../01/16.md) says, those other nations will disappear completely, but the descendants of Jacob will continue as a people. Alternate translation: “But in Jerusalem some people will remain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:17	y9pz		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בְ⁠הַ֥ר צִיּ֛וֹן	1	This is a figure of speech that refers to Jerusalem by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. Alternate translation: “But in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:17	b4sh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	וְ⁠הָ֣יָה קֹ֑דֶשׁ	1	If your language does not use abstract nouns, you can translate the word **holiness** by using an adjective. Alternate translation: “and it will be a holy place”\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1:17	cr13		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	בֵּ֣ית יַֽעֲקֹ֔ב	1	Here, **the house of Jacob** is an idiom that means “the descendants of Jacob” and by extension, all of the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1:17	f4ur			אֵ֖ת מוֹרָֽשֵׁי⁠הֶם	1	Here, **possessions** refers to the land that was supposed to be passed down from generation to generation to each of the Israelite families and clans. If using a plural term is confusing, you can translate it with a singular word. Alternate translation: “the land that belongs to each of them”
+1:18	rm2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism	וְ⁠הָיָה֩ בֵית־יַעֲקֹ֨ב אֵ֜שׁ וּ⁠בֵ֧ית יוֹסֵ֣ף לֶהָבָ֗ה	1	These two expressions have similar meanings. Yahweh is showing that what he is saying is important by saying it more than once. Both **house of Jacob** and **house of Joseph** stand for all of the Israelites. Alternate translation: “The Israelites will be like a fire. Yes, they will be like a flame” If saying this twice is confusing, you could combine them into one expression, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+1:18	cr15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בֵית־יַעֲקֹ֨ב	1	Here, the word **house** means all of the people descended from a particular person. All of the descendants of Jacob are being described figuratively as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1:18	cr17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	וּ⁠בֵ֧ית יוֹסֵ֣ף	1	The descendants of Joseph are also being described figuratively as if they were one household. Joseph was the son of Jacob, and his descendants made up a large part of the people of Israel. So Yahweh is using his descendants to represent the whole nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1:18	yt8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וּ⁠בֵ֤ית עֵשָׂו֙ & לְ⁠בֵ֣ית עֵשָׂ֔ו	1	The descendants of Esau (Edom) are also being described figuratively as if they were one household. Alternate translation: “the people of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:18	cr19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֵ֜שׁ & לֶהָבָ֗ה & לְ⁠קַ֔שׁ	1	Yahweh is saying figuratively that just as fire and flame burn up dry grass until it is all gone, the Israelites who survive will conquer all of Edom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:18	cr21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor	אֵ֜שׁ & לֶהָבָ֗ה & לְ⁠קַ֔שׁ	1	Yahweh is saying that the Israelites are like fire and flame, that the people of Edom are like dry grass, and that the Israelites will do to the people of Edom what fire and flame do to dry grass. This is using the same figurative language to make a series of related points. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
-1:18	hj8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לְ⁠קַ֔שׁ	1	This means the dry pieces of plants that are left in the ground after their stalks have been cut. Alternate translation: “dry grass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:18	cr23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠דָלְק֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם וַ⁠אֲכָל֑וּ⁠ם	1	**Burn** and **consume** mean almost the same thing. Yahweh uses the words together to mean **burn them until they are all burned up.** Alternate translation: “burn them up completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-1:18	c5jr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ֥י יְהוָ֖ה דִּבֵּֽר	1	This means, “This will certainly happen because I, Yahweh, have said it will happen.” You could use that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:19	x15u			וְ⁠יָרְשׁ֨וּ & וְ⁠יָרְשׁוּ֙	1	Here, **They** appears to refer to the people of Israel in general. Alternate translation: “The Israelites”
-1:19	cr25			וְ⁠יָרְשׁ֨וּ & וְ⁠יָרְשׁוּ֙	1	This verse as a whole describes people who live in different parts of Israel conquering the territories next to them. Alternate translation: “capture”
-1:19	ep84		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ⁠נֶּ֜גֶב	1	The Negev is the southern Judean wilderness. That location is being used figuratively to mean the people who live there. The people are being described by the name of something closely associated with them, the land they live in. So **the Negev** actually means **the Israelites who live in the southern Judean wilderness.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:19	cr27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֗ו	1	This was one of the mountains in Edom. Yahweh is referring to the whole territory by the name of one prominent part of it. Alternate translation: “the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:19	m7qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁפֵלָה֙	1	The Shephelah means the western foothills in the land of Israel. That location is being used figuratively to mean the people who live there. The people are being described by the name of something closely associated with them, the land they live in. So **the Shephelah** actually means **the Israelites who live in the western foothills.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:19	cr29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים	1	This means **the region of Phoenicia.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:19	gup4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֖ן	1	This means **the people of the tribe of Benjamin.** All the people are being portrayed as if they were a single person, their ancestor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-1:19	cr31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ⁠גִּלְעָֽד	1	This means **the region east of the Jordan River.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:20	xw8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠גָלֻ֣ת הַֽ⁠חֵל־הַ֠⁠זֶּה לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל	1	This means **people who were captured and taken away from their homes.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:20	cr33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	וְ⁠גָלֻ֣ת	1	Yahweh is saying that these people will return, and they will conquer territories as well. You could say that explicitly in some way such as, “The people who were captured and taken away from their homes will return, and they will capture …” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:20	t8hm			הַֽ⁠חֵל	1	This means **a large number of people.** You could say that as an alternate translation.
-1:20	cr35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל	1	This actually means **the descendants of Israel.** Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:20	cr37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	כְּנַעֲנִים֙	1	This means **the land where the people of Canaan lived.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:20	r8cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עַד־צָ֣רְפַ֔ת	1	Zarephath was a Phoenician city north of Israel on the coast of the Mediterranean between Tyre and Sidon. Alternate translation: “as far north as Zarephath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:20	u5t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠גָלֻ֥ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם	1	This means **the people of Israel who were captured and taken away from Jerusalem.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:20	x6yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בִּ⁠סְפָרַ֑ד	1	This is the name of a place whose location is unknown. Some experts suggest that it refers to the city of Sardis in the region of Lydia. Alternate translation: “They now live in Sepharad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:20	cr39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יִֽרְשׁ֕וּ	1	Yahweh is saying that these people will also return and conquer territories. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “return and occupy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-1:20	cr41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠נֶּֽגֶב	1	This means **the southern Judean wilderness.** You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-1:21	j7nf			וְ⁠עָל֤וּ מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙ בְּ⁠הַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֖ט אֶת־הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו	1	This means, **After Israel’s military leaders conquer the land of Edom, they will rule over it from high up in Jerusalem.** You could say that as an alternate translation. Even though the mountain of Zion is a figurative name for Jerusalem, it would be good to say something like “high” here, reflecting the imagery of “mountain.” Edom boasted that it was up high and no one could bring it down, but Yahweh is saying that he will bring it down and place his own people up high instead.
-1:21	hyg2			מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙	1	This means Israelite military leaders whom God will use to defeat the nation of Edom. Alternate translation: “military leaders”
-1:21	cr43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠הַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן	1	Yahweh is referring to Jerusalem figuratively by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. Alternate translation: “Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-1:21	cr45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו	1	This phrase refers to the mountainous territory where Esau, the brother of Jacob, went and settled. So it means “the hill country that came to belong to Esau and his descendants.” Alternate translation: “the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-1:21	wy7x			וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה הַ⁠מְּלוּכָֽה	1	This phrase emphasizes that Yahweh will personally rule over the kingdom. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will be their king”
+1:18	cr19		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	אֵ֜שׁ & לֶהָבָ֗ה & לְ⁠קַ֔שׁ	1	In this metaphor, Yahweh is saying that the Israelites will be like fire and flame, that the people of Edom will be like dry grass, and that the Israelites will do to the people of Edom what fire and flame do to dry grass. In other words, just as fire and flame burn up dry grass until it is all gone, the Israelites who survive will conquer all of Edom. If this metaphor is not clear in your language, you could make it a simile, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:18	hj8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown	לְ⁠קַ֔שׁ	1	The word **stubble** means the dry pieces of plants that are left in the ground after their stalks have been cut. Alternate translation: “like dry grass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+1:18	cr23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	וְ⁠דָלְק֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם וַ⁠אֲכָל֑וּ⁠ם	1	**Burn** and **consume** mean almost the same thing. Yahweh uses the words together to intensify the meaning. If you do not have two similar words in your language or if it would be confusing to say this twice, you can combine them into one phrase and intensify the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “and they will burn them until they are all burned up” or “and they will burn them up completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+1:18	amum		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	כִּ֥י	1	Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason for what came before. Yahweh is reminding the reader that these things will certainly happen, because this message comes from him. If that would be clearer in your language, you can say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:18	c5jr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person	כִּ֥י יְהוָ֖ה דִּבֵּֽר	1	Yahweh is speaking of himself in the third person here. If that is confusing in your language, you can change it to first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+1:19	cr25			וְ⁠יָרְשׁ֨וּ	1	This verse as a whole describes people who live in different parts of Israel conquering the territories next to them. Alternate translation: “will conquer”
+1:19	zu8p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	הַ⁠נֶּ֜גֶב	1	The **Negev** is the name of the southern region of Judea that is dry, rocky, and barren. It is being used to represent the people who live there. The people are being described by the name of something closely associated with them, the land that they live in. Alternate translation: “The Israelites who live in the Negev” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:19	cr27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֗ו	1	This was one of the mountains in Edom. See how you translated this in verses 8 and 9. Yahweh is referring to the whole territory of Edom by using the name of one prominent part of it. Alternate translation: “the country of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:19	m7qk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁפֵלָה֙	1	The **Shephelah** is the name of the western foothills in the land of Israel. That location is being used figuratively to represent the people who live there. The people are being described by the name of something closely associated with them, the land that they live in. Alternate translation: “the Israelites who live in the western foothills.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:19	dew4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁפֵלָה֙ אֶת־פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים	1	Here, the reader is expected to supply the verb **will possess** from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and the Israelites who live in the Shephelah will possess the land of the Philistines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:19	cr29		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים	1	The **Philistines** were people who occupied the territory to the west of Israel. Here, the people are used to represent that territory, also known as the region of Phoenicia. Alternate translation: “the region of the Philistines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:19	app9			וְ⁠יָרְשׁוּ֙	1	“The people of Israel will possess”
+1:19	vmfw		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	אֶת־שְׂדֵ֣ה אֶפְרַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׂדֵ֣ה שֹׁמְר֑וֹן	1	Here, **field** refers to a large, open area, and represents the whole territory that belonged to the tribe of **Ephraim** and that surrounded the city of **Samaria**. Alternate translation: “all of the territory that had belonged to the people of Ephraim and all of the area around Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:19	gup4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֖ן	1	Here, **Benjamin** represents the people of the tribe of Benjamin. All the people are being portrayed as if they were a single person, their ancestor. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+1:19	czq7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֖ן אֶת־הַ⁠גִּלְעָֽד	1	Here, the reader is expected to supply the verb **will possess** from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and the people of the tribe of Benjamin will possess the land of Gilead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:19	cr31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ⁠גִּלְעָֽד	1	**Gilead** is a region east of the land of Israel, across the Jordan River. It is being used to represent the areas to the east. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:20	xw8x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠גָלֻ֣ת הַֽ⁠חֵל־הַ֠⁠זֶּה	1	Here, **exile** is a collective singular noun that includes all of the people who were exiled. Alternate translation: “All of the large group of people who were captured and taken away from their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+1:20	t8hm			הַֽ⁠חֵל	1	Here, the word translated as **army** can also mean “a large number of people.” In this context, the large number of people are also described as capturing territory, so they will be acting as an army. If you have a term that can mean both of these things, use it here. If not, then choose the term that fits best.
+1:20	cr35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל	1	There are two possibilities for the meaning of **the sons of Israel** here. (1) In this context, **Israel** is identified as occupying territory in the north and is in contrast with **Jerusalem**, so it seems that **the sons of Israel** is referring to people who are from the northern kingdom of Israel. Alternate translation: “from northern Israel” (2) It could refer to all of the descendants of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1:20	cr37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	אֲשֶֽׁר־כְּנַעֲנִים֙	1	The land of Canaan is where the people of Israel lived before they were exiled. So the people are being called by the name of the place where they lived, and where they will live again. Alternate translation: “who lived in the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:20	r8cn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	עַד־צָ֣רְפַ֔ת	1	Zarephath was a Phoenician city north of Israel on the coast of the Mediterranean Sea between Tyre and Sidon. Alternate translation: “as far north as Zarephath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1:20	zdk5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	עַד־צָ֣רְפַ֔ת	1	The reader is expected to supply the verb “will possess” or “will capture” from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “will capture the territory as far north as Zarephath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+1:20	u5t1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns	וְ⁠גָלֻ֥ת יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם	1	Here, **exile** is a collective singular noun that includes all of the people who were captured and taken away from their homes in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “The people who were captured and taken away from their homes in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
+1:20	x6yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	בִּ⁠סְפָרַ֑ד	1	**Sepharad** is the name of a place whose location is unknown to modern scholars. Some experts suggest that it refers to the city of Sardis in the region of Lydia. This would be in Asia Minor, northwest of Israel, in what is now the country of Turkey. Alternate translation: “currently live in Sepharad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1:20	cr39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	יִֽרְשׁ֕וּ	1	In order to conquer the **cities of the Negev**, these exiles first will return from the distant lands where they are living. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they will come back and conquer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1:20	cr41		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	הַ⁠נֶּֽגֶב	1	The **Negev** is the name of the southern region of Judea that is dry, rocky, and barren. See how you translated this in [verse 19](../01/19.md) Alternate translation: “the southern Judean wilderness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+1:21	j7nf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	וְ⁠עָל֤וּ מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙ בְּ⁠הַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֖ט אֶת־הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו	1	Even though **the mountain of Zion** is a figurative name for Jerusalem, it would be good to keep the imagery of this high place in Jerusalem where God’s temple was, if possible. This would also allow the comparison with **the mountain of Esau**. Edom had boasted that it was up high and that no one could bring it down. But with this figurative imagery, Yahweh is saying that he will bring it down and place his own people up high instead. You can also choose to express this meaning in plain language if that would be clearer and if that is how you have been translating the book. Alternate translation: “Israel’s saviors will go up to Jerusalem and will rule over Edom, who thought that they were so high, from up there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:21	hyg2			מֽוֹשִׁעִים֙	1	Here, **saviors** refers to Israelite military leaders whom God will use to defeat the nation of Edom. Alternate translation: “the leaders who have saved Israel”
+1:21	cr43		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	בְּ⁠הַ֣ר צִיּ֔וֹן	1	Yahweh is referring to Jerusalem figuratively by the name of something closely associated with it, the mountain that the city is built on. See how you translated this in verses 16 and 17. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1:21	cr45		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	הַ֣ר עֵשָׂ֑ו	1	This phrase refers to the mountainous territory where Esau, the brother of Jacob and the ancestor of the Edomites, went and settled. So it means “the hill country that came to belong to Esau and his descendants.” See how you translated this in verses 8, 9, and 19. Alternate translation: “the land of Edom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+1:21	wy7x			וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה הַ⁠מְּלוּכָֽה	1	This phrase emphasizes that Yahweh will personally rule over the kingdom of Israel as they rule over Edom. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will be the king over all”

tn_PHM.tsv

@@ -11,9 +11,9 @@ front:intro	sz2w				0	# Introduction to Philemon\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 1:2	sq44		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Ἀρχίππῳ	1	This is the name of a man in the church with Philemon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 1:2	mnn5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν	1	Paul speaks here of Archippus as if they were both soldiers in an army. He means that Archippus works hard, as Paul himself works hard, to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “our fellow spiritual warrior” or “who also fights the spiritual battle with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:3	r4nq			χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	“May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” This is a blessing.
-1:3	e5z8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	The word “our” here refers to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	e5z8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	The word “our” here refers to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	lh8a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
-1:4	kh5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “us” is plural and refers to Paul, those with him, and all Christians, including the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:4	kh5l		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “us” is plural and refers to Paul, those with him, and all Christians, including the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:6	t54l			ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου	1	“your working together with us”
 1:6	pxw1			ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ	1	“result in knowing what is good”
 1:6	n25e			εἰς Χριστόν	1	“because of Christ”

tn_PHP.tsv

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Reference	ID	Tags	SupportReference	Quote	Occurrence	Note
 front:intro	pv9j				0	# Introduction to Philippians\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of the Philippians\n\n1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)\n1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)\n1. Instructions\n- To be steadfast (1:27-30)\n- To be united (2:1-2)\n- To be humble (2:3-11)\n- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)\n- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)\n1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)\n1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)\n1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)\n1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)\n1. Final remarks\n- Values (4:8-9)\n- Contentment (4:10-20)\n- Final Greetings (4:21-23)\n\n### Who wrote the Book Philippians?\n\nPaul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.\n\n### What is the Book of Philippians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Philippi like?\n\nPhilip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?\n\nThe “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).\n\n### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?\n\n* Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 1:intro	kd3g				0	# Philippians 01 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The day of Christ\nThis probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
-1:1	c255		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Paul and Timothy wrote this letter to the church at Philippi. Because Paul writes later in the letter saying “I,” it is generally assumed that he is the author and that Timothy, who is with him, writes as Paul speaks. All instances of “you” and “your” in the letter refer to the believers in the Philippian church and are plural. The word “our” probably refers to all believers in Christ, including Paul, Timothy, and the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:1	c255		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Paul and Timothy wrote this letter to the church at Philippi. Because Paul writes later in the letter saying “I,” it is generally assumed that he is the author and that Timothy, who is with him, writes as Paul speaks. All instances of “you” and “your” in the letter refer to the believers in the Philippian church and are plural. The word “our” probably refers to all believers in Christ, including Paul, Timothy, and the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:1	kze2			Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος & καὶ διακόνοις	1	If your language has a particular way of introducing the authors of a letter, use it here.
 1:1	kx8h			Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος, δοῦλοι Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	“Timothy, who are servants of Christ Jesus”
 1:1	na5j			πᾶσιν τοῖς ἁγίοις ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	This refers to those whom God chose to belong to him by being united to Christ. Alternate translation: “all God’s people in Christ Jesus” or “all those who belong to God because they are united with Christ”
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ front:intro	pv9j				0	# Introduction to Philippians\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 3:2	zin8			τοὺς κύνας & τοὺς κακοὺς ἐργάτας & τὴν κατατομήν	1	These are three different ways of describing the same group of false teachers. Paul is using strong expressions to convey his feeling about these Jewish Christian teachers.
 3:2	yr9n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοὺς κύνας	1	The word “dogs” was used by the Jews to refer to those who were not Jews. They were considered unclean. Paul speaks of the false teachers as though they were dogs, to insult them. If you have a different animal in your culture that is considered unclean or whose name is used as an insult, you could use this animal instead. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
 3:2	cka6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole	τὴν κατατομήν	1	Paul is exaggerating about the act of circumcision to insult the false teachers. The false teachers said God will only save a person who is circumcised, who cuts off the foreskin. This action was required by the law of Moses for all male Israelites. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-3:3	y8yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμεῖς γάρ ἐσμεν	1	Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and all true believers in Christ, including the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:3	y8yt		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς γάρ ἐσμεν	1	Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and all true believers in Christ, including the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:3	xt5r			ἡ περιτομή	1	Paul uses this phrase to refer to believers in Christ who are not physically circumcised but are spiritually circumcised, which means they have received the Holy Spirit through faith. Alternate translation: “the truly circumcised ones” or “truly God’s people”
 3:3	k8ph			οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες	1	“do not trust that only cutting our flesh will please God”
 3:4	e346		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	καίπερ	1	“Although if I wanted to.” Paul is introducing a hypothetical situation that could not possibly exist. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ front:intro	pv9j				0	# Introduction to Philippians\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 3:14	lmr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως	1	Possible meanings are that Paul speaks of living eternally with God as if God were to call Paul to ascend (1) to heaven as Jesus did or (2) the steps to the podium where winners of races received prizes, as a metaphor for meeting God face to face and receiving eternal life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:15	de4y			ὅσοι & τέλειοι, τοῦτο φρονῶμεν	1	Paul wants his fellow believers to have the same desires he listed in [Philippians 3:8-11](./08.md). Alternate translation: “I encourage all of us believers who are strong in the faith to think the same way”
 3:15	yy22			καὶ τοῦτο ὁ Θεὸς ὑμῖν ἀποκαλύψει	1	“God will also make it clear to you” or “God will make sure you know it”
-3:16	pxn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	εἰς ὃ ἐφθάσαμεν, τῷ αὐτῷ στοιχεῖν	1	Paul uses “we” to include the Philippian believers. Alternate translation: “let us all continue obeying the same truth we have already received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:16	pxn9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	εἰς ὃ ἐφθάσαμεν, τῷ αὐτῷ στοιχεῖν	1	Paul uses “we” to include the Philippian believers. Alternate translation: “let us all continue obeying the same truth we have already received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:17	jed4			συνμιμηταί μου γίνεσθε	1	“Do what I do” or “Live as I live”
 3:17	uxc5			ἀδελφοί	1	See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md).
 3:17	h4tv			τοὺς οὕτω περιπατοῦντας, καθὼς ἔχετε τύπον ἡμᾶς	1	“those who already are living as I live” or “those who already are doing what I do”
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ front:intro	pv9j				0	# Introduction to Philippians\n## Part 1: General Introduc
 3:19	hn9i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὧν ὁ Θεὸς ἡ κοιλία	1	Here “stomach” refers to a person’s desires for physical pleasure. Calling it their god means that they want these pleasures more than they want to obey God. Alternate translation: “they desire food and other physical pleasures more than they desire to obey God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:19	u9cl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐτῶν	1	Here “shame” stands for the actions that the people should be ashamed about but are not. Alternate translation: “they are proud of the things that should cause them shame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 3:19	sv5z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	οἱ τὰ ἐπίγεια φρονοῦντες	1	Here “earthly” refers to everything that gives physical pleasure and does not honor God. Alternate translation: “All they think about is what will please themselves rather than what will please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-3:20	q1cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	By Paul’s use of “our” and “we” here, he includes himself and the believers in Philippi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:20	q1cc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	By Paul’s use of “our” and “we” here, he includes himself and the believers in Philippi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:20	n2lh			ἡμῶν & τὸ πολίτευμα ἐν οὐρανοῖς ὑπάρχει	1	Possible meanings are (1) “we are citizens of heaven” or (2) “our homeland is heaven” or (3) “our true home is heaven.”
 3:21	eye2			ὃς μετασχηματίσει τὸ σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως ἡμῶν	1	“He will change our weak, earthly bodies”
 3:21	b2bc			σύμμορφον τῷ σώματι τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ	1	“into bodies like his glorious body”

tn_PRO.tsv

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ front:intro	spe4				0	# Introduction to Proverbs\n## Part 1: General Introductio
 1:1	q6pn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry		0	Verses 2-33 are poetry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
 1:2	iaq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns		0	This can be reworded so that the abstract nouns “wisdom” and “instruction” can be stated as adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “to teach you how to be wise and to instruct you about how to live moral lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:2	rs3p				0	“to help you understand wise teachings”
-1:3	ew1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here “you” refers to the readers. If it is more natural in your language you can state it as an inclusive “we.” Alternate translation: “that we may receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	ew1z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	Here “you” refers to the readers. If it is more natural in your language you can state it as an inclusive “we.” Alternate translation: “that we may receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:3	aun5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns		0	This can be reworded so that the abstract noun “instruction” is stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “may be instructed how to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 1:4	be4c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns		0	This can be reworded so that the abstract noun “wisdom” can be stated as the adjective “wise.” This can also be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “also teach to those who are naive how to be wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:4	j62d				0	inexperienced or immature

tn_PSA.tsv

@@ -564,8 +564,8 @@ front:intro	rx9u				0	# Introduction to Psalms\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 20:6	xcm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	God’s right hand represents his power. Alternate translation: “with his great strength he will rescue him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 20:7	f9cd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy		0	Here “chariots” and “horses” represent a king’s army. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 20:7	xr24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis		0	The word “trust” is understood. Alternate translation: “other trust in horses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-20:7	mwu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the writer and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
-20:8	e7uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the writer and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+20:7	mwu6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the writer and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+20:8	e7uq		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Here “we” refers to the writer and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 20:8	q1tp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	The word “They” refers to the people who trust in chariots and horses. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will bring them down and make them fall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 20:8	g7uv		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet		0	Both these verbs mean basically the same thing. Both of these stand for losing in battle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 20:8	y7lr		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet		0	“we will get up and stand up straight.” These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Both of these stand for victory in battle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -2185,7 +2185,7 @@ front:intro	rx9u				0	# Introduction to Psalms\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 62:6	izy6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive		0	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “nothing can move me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 62:7	c9fh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	The writer speaks of God as if he were a rock that keeps one safe from his enemies. He also speaks of God as if he were a shelter that provides protection. Alternate translation: “God always gives me strength and protection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 62:8	yq3j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom		0	This refers to telling God your inner feelings as if you were pouring out a liquid. Alternate translation: “give your deepest concerns to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-62:8	ss3p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “us” refers to David and the people he is speaking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+62:8	ss3p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “us” refers to David and the people he is speaking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 62:9	zu93		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism		0	This refers to men of all levels of wealth and importance. The phrases “are vanity” and “are a lie” have the same meaning. One cannot confidently trust in anyone. Alternate translation: “you cannot place your trust in men, no matter how important they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 62:9	ckm7				0	If you put all of these kinds of men together on a scale, they would have no weight. This means that they have no real value to you.
 62:10	ubx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet		0	These two words have basically the same meaning. You cannot trust in money that you get by taking it from other people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -2293,12 +2293,12 @@ front:intro	rx9u				0	# Introduction to Psalms\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 66:6	t4bb				0	These words refer to God.
 66:6	ipc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit		0	This refers to the crossing of the Red Sea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 66:6	dbi6				0	The word “they” refers to God’s people, the Israelites.
-66:6	c4mh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “we” refers to the Israelites, their ancestors, David, and the people he is speaking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+66:6	c4mh		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” refers to the Israelites, their ancestors, David, and the people he is speaking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 66:7	fhu2				0	These words refer to God.
 66:7	v55x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche		0	These phrase “his eyes” refers to God himself. Alternate translation: “he sees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 66:7	csw4				0	“let not the rebellious people exalt themselves” or “let not the rebellious people be proud”
 66:8	p33g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism		0	These two clauses have similar meanings. The idea is repeated to emphasize the importance of praising God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-66:9	nub8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	These words refer to David and the people he is speaking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+66:9	nub8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	These words refer to David and the people he is speaking to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 66:9	qfj9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	The writer speaks of God’s protection as preventing his people from slipping as they walk or falling off a cliff. Alternate translation: “he has not allowed us to fall into disaster” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 66:11	eq4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	The writer speaks of God’s punishment as if God had captured his people in a net. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 66:11	wp2k				0	a trap for a bird or an animal

tn_REV.tsv

@@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ front:intro	xx8l				0	# Introduction to Revelation\n## Part 1: General Introduct
 19:4	y4qd			τὰ τέσσερα ζῷα	1	“the four living beings” or “the four living things.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md)
 19:4	dns7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “who sat on the throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 19:5	w9qe		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	φωνὴ ἀπὸ τοῦ θρόνου ἐξῆλθεν	1	Here John speaks of the “voice” as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “someone spoke from the throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-19:5	c3lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	αἰνεῖτε τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν	1	Here “our” refers to the speaker and all God’s servants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+19:5	c3lm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	αἰνεῖτε τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν	1	Here “our” refers to the speaker and all God’s servants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 19:5	cck3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οἱ φοβούμενοι αὐτόν	1	Here “fear” does not mean to be afraid of God, but to honor him. Alternate translation: “all you who honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 19:5	qdb3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism	οἱ μικροὶ καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι	1	The speaker uses these words together to mean all of God’s people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 19:6	kq7n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	καὶ ἤκουσα ὡς φωνὴν ὄχλου πολλοῦ, καὶ ὡς φωνὴν ὑδάτων πολλῶν, καὶ ὡς φωνὴν βροντῶν ἰσχυρῶν	1	John speaks of what he is hearing as if it were like the sound made by a very large crowd of people, a large body of rushing water, and very loud thunder. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

tn_ROM.tsv

@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 2:1	md5e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	εἶ	1	Here the pronoun “you” is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 2:1	jt4b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὦ ἄνθρωπε, πᾶς ὁ κρίνων	1	Paul uses the word “person” here to scold anyone who might think he can act like God and judge others. Alternate translation: “You are just a human being, yet you judge others and say they deserve God’s punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 2:1	ybp2			ἐν ᾧ γὰρ κρίνεις τὸν ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις	1	“But you are only judging yourself because you do the same wicked deeds as they do”
-2:2	jr4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οἴδαμεν δὲ	1	Here the pronoun “we” may include Christian believers and also Jews who are not Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:2	jr4i		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν δὲ	1	Here the pronoun “we” may include Christian believers and also Jews who are not Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:2	kfy1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν ἐπὶ τοὺς	1	Here Paul speaks of “God’s judgment” as if it were alive and could “fall” on people. Alternate translation: “God will judge those people truly and fairly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 2:2	rgw4			τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας	1	“the people who do those wicked deeds”
 2:3	wg1h			λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο	1	“So consider this” or “Therefore, consider this”
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 3:31	wb6r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως	1	Paul asks a question that one of his readers might have. Alternate translation: “Someone might say that we can ignore the law because we have faith.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 3:31	jdq1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	μὴ γένοιτο	1	This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar express in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “This is certainly not true” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 3:31	y6qx			νόμον ἱστάνομεν	1	“we obey the law”
-3:31	nzr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	καταργοῦμεν	1	This pronoun refers to Paul, other believers, and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:31	nzr7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καταργοῦμεν	1	This pronoun refers to Paul, other believers, and the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:intro	f9jc				0	# Romans 04 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The purpose of the law of Moses\nPaul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Circumcision\nCircumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\nPaul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
 4:1	gw29				0	Paul confirms that even in the past believers were made right with God by faith and not by the law.
 4:1	gwp3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα	1	Paul uses the question to catch the attention of the reader and to start talking about something new. Alternate translation: “This is what Abraham our physical ancestor found” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 4:16	mex6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα κατὰ χάριν & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν	1	Here “the promise may rest on grace” represents God giving what he promised because of his grace. Alternate translation: “so that what he promised might be a free gift” or “so that his promise would be because of his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 4:16	ns6r			τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου	1	This refers to the Jewish people, who were obligated to obey the law of Moses.
 4:16	v4z9			τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ	1	This refers to those who have faith as Abraham did before he was circumcised. Alternate translation: “those who believe as Abraham did”
-4:16	l7gg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Here the word “us” refers to Paul and includes all Jewish and non-Jewish believers in Christ. Abraham is the physical ancestor of the Jewish people, but he is also the spiritual father of those who have faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:16	l7gg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν	1	Here the word “us” refers to Paul and includes all Jewish and non-Jewish believers in Christ. Abraham is the physical ancestor of the Jewish people, but he is also the spiritual father of those who have faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:17	iju4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Where it is written can be made explicit. You can also translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “as someone has written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:17	mxm5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	τέθεικά σε	1	Here the word “you” is singular and refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 4:17	ph37		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ, τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς	1	Here “of him whom he trusted” refers to God. Alternate translation: “Abraham was in the presence of God whom he trusted, who gives life to those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -313,33 +313,33 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 4:23	a92n			ἐγράφη δὲ	1	“Now” is used here to connect Abraham’s being made right by faith to present-day believer’s being made right by faith in Christ’s death and resurrection.
 4:23	r65c			δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον	1	“for Abraham only”
 4:23	z432		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “that God counted righteousness to him” or “God considered him righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-4:24	pfc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς	1	The word “us” refers to Paul and includes all believers in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+4:24	pfc9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	δι’ ἡμᾶς	1	The word “us” refers to Paul and includes all believers in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 4:24	nh4k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	καὶ δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “It was also for our benefit, because God will consider us righteous also if we believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 4:24	a6c7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	“Raised…from the dead” here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “him who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 4:25	cca1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃς παρεδόθη διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἠγέρθη διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave over to enemies for our trespasses and whom God brought back to life so he could make us right with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 5:intro	i1dt				0	# Romans 05 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nMany scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Results of justification\nHow Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])\n\n### “All sinned”\nScholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n\n### The second Adam\nAdam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
 5:1	xmp3				0	Paul begins to tell many different things that happen when God makes believers right with him.
 5:1	age4			δικαιωθέντες οὖν	1	“Because we are justified”
-5:1	s6xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	 & ἡμῶν	1	All occurrences of “we” and “our” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:1	s6xd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	 & ἡμῶν	1	All occurrences of “we” and “our” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:1	p11y			διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	“because of our Lord Jesus Christ”
 5:1	me59			τοῦ Κυρίου	1	Here “Lord” means that Jesus is God.
 5:2	du8b			δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν	1	Here “by faith” refers to our trust in Jesus, which allows us to stand before God. Alternate translation: “Because we trust in Jesus, God allows us to come into his presence”
 5:3	q5p7			οὐ μόνον δέ	1	The word “this” refers to the ideas described in [Romans 5:1-2](./01.md).
-5:3	u14f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	καυχώμεθα & 	1	These words refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:3	u14f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καυχώμεθα & 	1	These words refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:4	sx5f			ἐλπίδα	1	This is the certainty that God will fulfill all his promises for those who trust in Christ.
-5:5	i8pd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῖν	1	These words refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:5	i8pd		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῖν	1	These words refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:5	pp1n		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἡ & ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει	1	Paul uses personification here as he speaks of “confidence” as if it were alive. Alternate translation: “we are very confident that we will receive the things that we wait for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 5:5	qka8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	Here “hearts” represents a person’s thoughts, feelings, or inner person. The phrase “the love of God has been poured into our hearts” is a metaphor for God showing love to his people. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because he has loved us greatly” or “because God has shown us how much he loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-5:6	x5eg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The word “we” here refers to all believers and so should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:6	x5eg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	The word “we” here refers to all believers and so should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:7	xv5w			μόλις γὰρ ὑπὲρ δικαίου τις ἀποθανεῖται	1	“It is hard to find someone who is willing to die, even for a righteous man”
 5:7	nnj9			ὑπὲρ γὰρ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ, τάχα τις καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν	1	“But you might find someone who is willing to die for such a good person”
 5:8	xew8			συνίστησιν	1	You can translate this verb in past tense using “demonstrated” or “showed.”
-5:8	bw77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	All occurrences of “us” and “we” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:8	bw77		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν	1	All occurrences of “us” and “we” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:9	l35j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1	Here “justified” means that God puts us in a right relationship with himself. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “How much more will God do for us now that he has made us right with himself because of the death of Jesus on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 5:9	nvs3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῷ αἵματι	1	This is a metonym for the sacrificial death of Jesus on the cross. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 5:9	sh8f			σωθησόμεθα	1	This means that through Jesus’ sacrificial death on the cross, God has forgiven us and rescued us from being punished in hell for our sin.
 5:9	bev3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	τῆς ὀργῆς	1	Here “wrath” is a metonym that refers to God’s punishment of those who have sinned against him. Alternate translation: “God’s punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-5:10	v8a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ὄντες	1	All occurrences of “we” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:10	v8a1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ὄντες	1	All occurrences of “we” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 5:10	u6bn			Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, πολλῷ μᾶλλον καταλλαγέντες, σωθησόμεθα ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ	1	“God’s Son…the life of God’s Son”
 5:10	rnc5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	The death of the Son of the God has provided eternal forgiveness and made us friends with God, for all who believe in Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God allowed us to have a peaceful relationship with him because his son died for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 5:10	cu3c		rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ	1	This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -374,11 +374,11 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 5:21	wmy8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here Paul speaks of “sin” as if it were a king that ruled. Alternate translation: “as sin resulted in death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:21	w4ut		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὕτως καὶ ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Paul speaks of “grace” here as if it were a king that ruled. Alternate translation: “grace gave people everlasting life through the righteousness of Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 5:21	m5by		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	οὕτως & ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης	1	Paul speaks of “grace” here as if it were a king that ruled. The word “righteousness” refers to God’s ability to make people right with him. Alternate translation: “so God might give his free gift to people to make them right with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-5:21	ew1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Paul includes himself, his readers, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+5:21	ew1b		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	Paul includes himself, his readers, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 6:intro	v522				0	# Romans 06 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Against the Law\nIn this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n### Servants of sin\nBefore believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fruit\nThis chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\nPaul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Death\nPaul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
 6:1	x13n				0	Under grace, Paul tells those who believe in Jesus to live a new life as though dead to sin and alive to God.
 6:1	pvg3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ	1	Paul asks these rhetorical questions to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “So, what should we say about all of this? We certainly should not keep on sinning so that God will give us more and more grace! (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-6:1	fj9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἐροῦμεν	1	The pronoun “we” refers to Paul, his readers, and other people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+6:1	fj9e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἐροῦμεν	1	The pronoun “we” refers to Paul, his readers, and other people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 6:2	be39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Here “died to sin” means that those who follow Jesus are now like dead people who cannot be affected by sin. Paul uses this rhetorical question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “We are now like dead people on whom sin has no effect! So we certainly should not keep on sinning!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 6:3	x4xs		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ὅτι ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν?	1	Paul uses this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “Remember, when someone baptized us to show that we have a relationship with Christ, this also shows that we died with Christ on the cross! (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 6:4	f4va		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον	1	Here Paul speaks of a believer’s baptism in water as if it were a death and burial. Alternate translation: “When someone baptized us, it is just like that person buried us with Christ in the tomb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 7:5	xed9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι τῷ θανάτῳ	1	Here “fruit” is a metaphor for a “result of one’s actions” or “outcome of one’s actions.” Alternate translation: “which resulted in spiritual-death” or “the outcome of which was our own spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 7:6	mze7				0	Paul reminds us that God does not make us holy by the law.
 7:6	l8w4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-7:6	j6i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	κατηργήθημεν	1	This pronoun refers to Paul and the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+7:6	j6i3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	κατηργήθημεν	1	This pronoun refers to Paul and the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 7:6	l2l3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα	1	This refers to the law. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “to the law which held us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 7:6	rm8r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	γράμματος	1	This refers to the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 7:7	k1jj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν	1	Paul is introducing a new topic. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 8:35	qe2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα	1	The abstract nouns can be expressed with verbal phrases. Here “sword” is a metonym that represents being killed violently. Alternate translation: “Even if people cause us trouble, hurt us, take away our clothes and food, or kill us, they cannot separate us from the love of Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 8:35	q2dc		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία	1	These words both mean the same thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 8:36	t67y		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ	1	Here “your” is singular and refers to God. Alternate translation: “For you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-8:36	s7wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	Here “we” refers to the one who wrote this part of Scripture, but not his audience, who was God. The phrase “all day long” is an exaggeration to emphasize how much danger they are in. Paul uses this part of Scripture to show that all who belong to God should expect difficult times. This can be translated in an active form. Alternate translation: “our enemies continually seek to kill us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+8:36	s7wj		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν	1	Here “we” refers to the one who wrote this part of Scripture, but not his audience, who was God. The phrase “all day long” is an exaggeration to emphasize how much danger they are in. Paul uses this part of Scripture to show that all who belong to God should expect difficult times. This can be translated in an active form. Alternate translation: “our enemies continually seek to kill us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 8:36	g3pi		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς	1	Here Paul compares to livestock those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Our lives have no more value to them than the sheep they kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 8:37	iui3			ὑπερνικῶμεν	1	“we have complete victory”
 8:37	wcm6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς	1	You can make explicit the kind of love that Jesus showed. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus, who loved us so much he was willing to die for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 9:8	ta8t			τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	This refers to people who will inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham.
 9:9	up57			ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος οὗτος	1	“these are the words God used when he made the promise”
 9:9	wqb2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός	1	You can translate this in an active form to express that God will give a son to Sarah. Alternate translation: “I will give Sarah a son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-9:10	mb5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	Paul refers to Isaac as “our father” because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+9:10	mb5q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν	1	Paul refers to Isaac as “our father” because Isaac was the ancestor of Paul and of the Jewish believers in Rome. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 9:10	icc1			κοίτην, ἔχουσα	1	“had become pregnant”
 9:11	h16y			μήπω γὰρ γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον	1	“before the children were born and before they had done anything, whether good or bad”
 9:11	a1gz			ἵνα ἡ κατ’ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ μένῃ	1	“so that what God wants to happen according to His choice will happen”
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 9:23	v33r		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	σκεύη ἐλέους	1	Paul speaks of people as if they were containers. Alternate translation: “people who deserve mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 9:23	she3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ	1	Paul compares God’s wonderful actions here to great “riches.” Alternate translation: “his glory, which is of great value, upon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 9:23	t41s		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν	1	Here “glory” refers to life in heaven with God. Alternate translation: “whom he prepared ahead of time in order that they might live with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-9:24	y6vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	καὶ & ἡμᾶς	1	The word “us” here refers to Paul and fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+9:24	y6vp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	καὶ & ἡμᾶς	1	The word “us” here refers to Paul and fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 9:24	t8rn			ἐκάλεσεν	1	Here “called” means God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus.
 9:25	eqc2				0	In this section Paul explains how Israel’s unbelief as a nation was told ahead of time by the prophet Hosea.
 9:25	ewb4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει	1	Here “he” refers to God. Alternate translation: “As God says also in the book that Hosea wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 9:27	k9j8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile	ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης	1	Here Paul compares the number of the people of Israel to the number of grains of sand in the sea. Alternate translation: “too many to count” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 9:27	wig1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	σωθήσεται	1	Paul uses the word “saved” in a spiritual sense. If God saves a person, it means that through believing in Jesus’ death on the cross, God has forgiven him and rescued him from being punished for his sin. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 9:28	cm32			λόγον & ποιήσει Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς	1	Here “sentence” refers to how he has decided to punish people. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish people on the earth according to how he has said”
-9:29	dl9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῖν & ν ἐγενήθημεν	1	Here the words “us” and “we” refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+9:29	dl9x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν & ν ἐγενήθημεν	1	Here the words “us” and “we” refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 9:29	tk2e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν	1	God killed all of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah because of their sin. Alternate translation: “we all would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom and Gomorrah” or “God would have destroyed all of us, like he destroyed the cities of Sodom and Gommorah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 9:30	m5l2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν	1	Paul uses this question to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “This is what we must say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 9:30	ki4k			ὅτι ἔθνη	1	“We will say that the Gentiles”
@@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 13:12	p7xp		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἡ & ἡμέρα ἤγγικεν	1	Paul speaks of the time when people do what is right as the day. Alternate translation: “the time of righteousness will begin soon” or “it is as though it will soon be day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 13:12	bb8t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους	1	Paul speaks of “works of darkness” as if they are clothing that a person puts aside. Here to “put aside” means to stop doing something. Here “darkness” is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing the evil things that people do in the dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 13:12	y5n4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἐνδυσώμεθα & τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός	1	Here “light” is a metaphor for what is good and right. Paul speaks of doing what is right as if it were putting on armor to protect one’s self. Alternate translation: “let us start doing what is right. Doing this will protect us from what is evil like armor protects a solider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-13:13	gv4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+13:13	gv4q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	περιπατήσωμεν	1	Paul includes his readers and other believers with himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 13:13	e6ij		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν	1	Paul speaks of living as true believers as if one were walking while it is day. Alternate translation: “Let us walk in a visible way knowing that everyone can see us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 13:13	qes3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις	1	These concepts mean basically the same thing. You can combine them in your translation. Alternate translation: “sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 13:13	h6xl			ἔριδι	1	This refers to plotting against and arguing with other people.
@@ -950,9 +950,9 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 14:6	f9tm			Κυρίῳ ἐσθίει	1	“eats to honor the Lord” or “eats that way in order to honor the Lord”
 14:6	jh8j		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων	1	The word “everything” is understood from [Romans 14:3](../14/03.md). It can be repeatd here. Alternate translation: “He who does not eat everything” or “The person who does not eat certain kinds of food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 14:7	txm3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἑαυτῷ ζῇ	1	Here “lives for himself” means to live only to please oneself. Alternate translation: “None of us should live merely to please ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-14:7	u9ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οὐδεὶς & ἡμῶν	1	Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+14:7	u9ar		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οὐδεὶς & ἡμῶν	1	Paul is including his readers, so this is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 14:7	c9ls		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	οὐδεὶς ἑαυτῷ ἀποθνῄσκει	1	This means one’s death affects other people. Alternate translation: “none of us should think that when we die, it affects only us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-14:8	s3lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	Paul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+14:8	s3lb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	Paul is speaking of both himself and his readers, so all instances of “we” are inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 14:10	db9a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you	τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου	1	By using these questions, Paul is demonstrating how he might need to scold individuals among his readers. Alternate translation: “it is wrong for you to judge your brother, and it is wrong for you to despise your brother!” or “stop judging and despising your brother!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 14:10	al55			τὸν ἀδελφόν	1	Here this means a fellow Christian, male or female.
 14:10	jq85		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy	πάντες γὰρ παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	The “judgment seat” refers to God’s authority to judge. Alternate translation: “For God will judge us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -988,13 +988,13 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 15:1	cx66				0	Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived.
 15:1	u19s			δὲ	1	Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument.
 15:1	u73x		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ	1	Here “strong” refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-15:1	dx9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+15:1	dx9d		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	This refers to Paul, his readers, and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 15:1	cv61		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	τῶν ἀδυνάτων	1	Here “the weak” refers to the people who are weak in their faith. They believe that God does not allow them to eat some kinds of food. Alternate translation: “those who are weak in faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 15:2	z2k8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	πρὸς οἰκοδομήν	1	By this, Paul means to strengthen someone’s faith. Alternate translation: “to strengthen his faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 15:3	bcz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	Here Paul refers to a scripture where Christ (the Messiah) speaks to God. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the Messiah said to God in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 15:3	qni7			οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ	1	The insults of those who insulted God fell on Christ.
 15:4	txd4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὅσα γὰρ προεγράφη, εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν ἐγράφη	1	You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “For in times past, the prophets wrote everything in the Scriptures to teach us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-15:4	m7yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμετέραν & ἔχωμεν	1	Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+15:4	m7yy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμετέραν & ἔχωμεν	1	Paul includes his readers and other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 15:4	g6r1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν	1	Here “have confidence” means that the believers will know that God will fulfill his promises. You can make explicit the full meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “In this way the scriptures will encourage us to expect that God will do for us everything that he has promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 15:5	u2zm				0	Paul encourages the believers to remember that both Gentile believers and Jews that believe are made one in Christ.
 15:5	g5xm			Θεὸς & δῴη	1	“I pray that…God…will grant”
@@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ front:intro	gtn1				0	# Introduction to Romans\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 16:1	sg6a				0	Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name.
 16:1	vkg8			συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην	1	“I want you to respect Phoebe”
 16:1	sry4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Φοίβην	1	This is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-16:1	q86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν	1	The word “our” refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+16:1	q86q		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν	1	The word “our” refers to Paul and all believers. Alternate translation: “our sister in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 16:1	q669		rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names	Κενχρεαῖς	1	This was a seaport city in Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 16:2	cwx1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	αὐτὴν προσδέξησθε ἐν Κυρίῳ	1	Paul encourages the Roman believers to welcome Phoebe as a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “welcome her because we all belong to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 16:2	yic3			ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων	1	“in the way that believers should welcome other believers”

tn_RUT.tsv

@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ front:intro	f68r				0	# Introduction to Ruth\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 2:2	ed93			בִתִּֽ⁠י	1	Ruth was caring for Naomi as if she were her own mother, and Naomi addressed Ruth affectionately as her daughter. If this is confusing in your language, use the term that would indicate this kind of close relationship between two women in your language.
 2:3	ht73			וַ⁠יִּ֣קֶר מִקְרֶ֔⁠הָ	1	This means that Ruth was not aware that the field that she picked to glean in belonged to Naomi’s relative Boaz.
 2:3	ab11			מִ⁠מִּשְׁפַּ֥חַת אֱלִימֶֽלֶךְ	1	The use of the term **clan** here means that Boaz was related to Elimelek but did not have the same parents as Elimelek. The text is not saying that the clan was named after Elimelek or that Elimelek was the patriarch or leader of the clan.
-2:4	vys2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	וְ⁠הִנֵּה	1	The word **behold** alerts us to the important event of Boaz arriving at the field and seeing Ruth for the first time. Your language may also have a specific way of alerting someone to pay careful attention to what happens next in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+2:4	vys2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	וְ⁠הִנֵּה	1	The word **behold** alerts us to the important event of Boaz arriving at the field and seeing Ruth for the first time. Your language may also have a specific way of alerting someone to pay careful attention to what happens next in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 2:4	q1lv			בָּ֚א מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית לֶ֔חֶם	1	The fields were an unspecified distance outside of Bethlehem.
 2:4	r4bl			יְבָרֶכְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָֽה	1	**May Yahweh do good things for you**. This is a general blessing.
 2:5	a5ht			לְ⁠מִ֖י הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּֽאת	1	In that culture, women were under the authority of their male relatives. Boaz was asking who Ruth’s husband or father might be. He did not think that Ruth was a slave.
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ front:intro	f68r				0	# Introduction to Ruth\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 3:2	jdr4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	וְ⁠עַתָּ֗ה	1	Naomi’s rhetorical question in verse 1 gave the reason for the advice that she is about to give to Ruth in verses 2-4. This word marks what follows as the result of verse 1. In other words, Naomi advises Ruth what to do (3:2-4) because she desires to find a good, secure home for Ruth (3:1) If it is more clear in your language to state the reason after the result, you may want to put verse 1 after verses 2-4, marked as verses 1-4 together. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 3:2	b4h8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion	הֲ⁠לֹ֥א בֹ֨עַז֙ מֹֽדַעְתָּ֔⁠נוּ	1	Naomi used this question to remind Ruth of something she had already told her (See 2:20), to introduce the reason for what she is about to say. Alternate translation: “As you know, Boaz is our relative.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 3:2	j31t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	הָיִ֖ית אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתָ֑י⁠ו	1	If it helps for understanding, the translation can make explicit that she was working in the fields with these female workers. Alternate translation: “female workers you have been with in the fields” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-3:2	nd8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	הִנֵּה	1	The word **Look** indicates that the following statement is very important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+3:2	nd8v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	הִנֵּה	1	The word **Look** indicates that the following statement is very important. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 3:2	ms25			זֹרֶ֛ה	1	**he will be winnowing** To winnow means to separate grain from the unwanted chaff by tossing both the grain and chaff into the air, allowing the wind to blow the chaff away.
 3:3	ru6z			וָ⁠סַ֗כְתְּ	1	This is probably a reference to rubbing sweet-smelling oil on oneself, as a kind of perfume.
 3:3	e92h			וְיָרַ֣דְתְּ הַ⁠גֹּ֑רֶן	1	This refers to leaving the city and going to the open, flat area where workers could thresh and winnow grain.
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ front:intro	f68r				0	# Introduction to Ruth\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
 4:intro	pz6m				0	# Ruth 04 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### King David\n\nDespite being a Moabitess, Ruth became an ancestress of David. David was Israel’s greatest king. It may be surprising that a Gentile would become a part of such an important lineage, but it reminds us that God loves all people. Ruth had great faith in Yahweh. This shows us that God welcomes all who trust in him.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### **You must also acquire Ruth the Moabite woman**\n\nWith the privilege of using the family’s land came the responsibility to take care of the widows of the family. Therefore, the relative who wanted to use Naomi’s land had to also help Ruth to have a son who would carry on the family name and inheritance and provide for her.\n\n### **This was the custom in former times**\n\nThis is a comment made by the writer of the text. This indicates that there was a considerable period of time between the events that occurred and the time when they were written down.
 4:1	jdr8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent	וּ⁠בֹ֨עַז עָלָ֣ה הַ⁠שַּׁעַר֮	1	This clause introduces the next part of the story, in which Boaz takes the leading role as kinsman-redeemer and marries Ruth. Use your language’s way of introducing a new part of a story (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 4:1	m4by			הַ⁠שַּׁעַר֮	1	**to the gate of the city** or **to the gate of Bethlehem**. This was the main entrance to the walled town of Bethlehem. Inside the gate was an open area that was used as a meeting place to discuss community matters.
-4:1	jdr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה	1	The word **behold** alerts us to the important event of Boaz seeing the exact person whom he wanted to see walking by. Your language may also have a specific way of alerting someone to pay careful attention to what happens next in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-informremind]])
+4:1	jdr9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish	וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה	1	The word **behold** alerts us to the important event of Boaz seeing the exact person whom he wanted to see walking by. Your language may also have a specific way of alerting someone to pay careful attention to what happens next in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 4:1	kz1g			הַ⁠גֹּאֵ֤ל	1	This was the closest living male relative to Elimelek. See how you translated **kinsman-redeemer** in [2:20](../02/20/zu5f).
 4:1	ab38		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom	פְּלֹנִ֣י אַלְמֹנִ֑י	1	Boaz did not actually say these words; instead, he called the kinsman-redeemer by his name. This is an idiom that means that this is a specific person but the name is not given. The narrator has substituted this general term for the person’s name either because the specific name is not important for the story or the man’s name had been forgotten. If your language has an idiom to refer to a specific person without using his name, use that here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]).
 4:1	ab39		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations	פְּלֹנִ֣י אַלְמֹנִ֑י	1	In many languages, this is an awkward and unnatural way for someone to address another person. A way to make this more natural could be to turn this into an indirect quotation as in the UST. A combination of indirect and direct quotation is also possible: “Boaz called him by name, and said, ‘Turn aside and sit down here.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]).

tn_SNG.tsv

@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ front:intro	an3g				0	# Introduction to the Song of Songs\n## Part 1: General In
 1:3	z9t3		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile		0	Perfume has a good smell that spreads as the air moves. The name is either a metonym for (1) the person’s reputation, what other people think of him. Here the speaker says that people always think that the hearer is a good person, or (2) the person himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 1:4	v83t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you		0	“The word “you” refers to the man and so is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
 1:4	gec8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor		0	“Pull” or “Drag.” Here the woman described as being like a captive who is willing to follow her captor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1:4	ty2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive		0	The word “we” refers to the young woman together with the man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:4	ty2p		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive		0	The word “we” refers to the young woman together with the man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:4	isr6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns		0	The woman speaks of herself as if she were more than one person. Many versions change the pronoun to “I” as the UST does. Other versions present these as the words of the woman’s friends speaking about either the woman or the man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:4	at7l				0	“because of you”
 1:4	geq4				0	“let us praise”

tn_TIT.tsv

@@ -12,19 +12,19 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:3	abc9			ἐν κηρύγματι	1	“through the proclamation of the message”
 1:3	m41u		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 1:3	dpn4			τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	“of God, who saves us”
-1:3	xy18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+1:3	xy18		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 1:4	gu55		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	γνησίῳ τέκνῳ	1	Though Titus was not Paul’s biological **son**, they share a common faith in Christ. Paul considers relationship to Christ through faith to be more important than biological relationship. Thus, because of their relative ages and shared faith in Christ, Paul considers Titus as his own son. It may also be that Paul led Titus to faith in Christ, and so Titus is like a son in this spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “you are like a son to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:4	wx6c			κοινὴν πίστιν	1	Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “because we both believe in Christ”
 1:4	h93t		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη	1	This was a common greeting Paul used. You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and inner peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 1:4	s3yr			Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	“Christ Jesus who is our Savior”
-1:4	xy17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
-1:5	ew8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τούτου χάριν	1	The connecting phrase **For this purpose** introduces the goal that Paul wanted to accomplish when he left Titus in Crete (to ordain elders in the church). Alternate translation: “This is the reason” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
+1:4	xy17		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+1:5	ew8h		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal	τούτου χάριν	1	The connecting phrase **for this purpose** introduces the goal that Paul wanted to accomplish when he left Titus in Crete (to ordain elders in the church). Alternate translation: “This is the reason” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
 1:5	lh9b			ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ	1	“I told you to stay in Crete”
 1:5	ga62			ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ	1	“so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done”
 1:5	b52u			καταστήσῃς & πρεσβυτέρους	1	“appoint elders” or “designate elders”
 1:5	p56w			πρεσβυτέρους	1	In the early Christian churches, Christian elders gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith.
 1:6	wja4				0	Having told Titus to ordain elders in every city on the island of Crete, Paul then gives the requirements for elders.
-1:6	jen8			εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος	1	This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. Alternate translation: “Choose people who are blameless” or “An elder must be blameless” o be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “An elder must be without blame” or “An elder must not have a bad reputation”
+1:6	jen8			εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος	1	This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “An elder must be without blame” or “An elder must not have a bad reputation”
 1:6	ab70		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀνέγκλητος	1	To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “without blame” This can also be stated positively: “a person who has a good reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 1:6	q6uy		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ	1	This means that he has only one wife, that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 1:6	wd6q			τέκνα & πιστά	1	Possible meanings are (1) children who believe in Jesus or (2) children who are trustworthy.
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:7	g2zf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον	1	Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s household, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:7	d6l1			μὴ πάροινον	1	“not an alcoholic” or “not one who drinks much wine”
 1:7	j1qq			μὴ πλήκτην	1	“not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight”
-1:8	i549		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the things an elder is not to be (that Paul already stated), and the things an elder is to be (which Paul is about to state). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:8	i549		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	The connecting word **instead** introduces a contrast between the things an elder is not to be (that Paul already stated), and the things an elder is to be (which Paul is about to state). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1:8	vkq1			φιλάγαθον	1	“a person who loves to do good”
 1:8	xy11		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	σώφρονα & ἐγκρατῆ	1	These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 1:8	xy12		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	δίκαιον, ὅσιον	1	These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:12	h3jb		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κακὰ θηρία	1	This metaphor compares the Cretans to dangerous wild animals. Alternate translation: “as dangerous as wild animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:12	xyz1		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche	γαστέρες ἀργαί	1	The part of the body that stores food is used to represent the person who eats all the time. Alternate translation: “lazy gluttons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 1:13	fif8			δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν ἔλεγχε αὐτοὺς ἀποτόμως	1	“For that reason, you must use strong language that the Cretans will understand when you correct them”
-1:13	abck		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν	1	The connecting words **For this reason** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is that what the Cretan prophet said about his people is true (they are liars, evil, and lazy), and the result is that Titus should rebuke them severely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+1:13	abck		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν	1	The connecting words **for this reason** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is that what the Cretan prophet said about his people is true (they are liars, evil, and lazy), and the result is that Titus should rebuke them severely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1:13	je3r			ἵνα ὑγιαίνωσιν ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	See note on **sound** in [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “so they will have a healthy faith” or “so their faith may be true” or “so that they believe only what is true about God”
 1:13	abcl		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1	The connecting words **so that** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is the elder rebukes the Cretans severely, and the result is the Cretans become sound in the faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 1:13	xyz2		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ πίστει	1	Here the abstract noun **faith** represents the things that the people believe about God. Alternate translation: “in what they believe about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 1:14	m4a5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἀποστρεφομένων τὴν ἀλήθειαν	1	Paul speaks of the truth as if it were an object that one could turn away from or avoid. Alternate translation: “reject the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:15	qtb9			πάντα καθαρὰ τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	“If people are pure on the inside, everything that they do will be pure” or “When people have only good thoughts, nothing that they do will offend God”
 1:15	nx42			τοῖς καθαροῖς	1	“To those who are acceptable to God”
-1:15	abcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast between people who are pure and people who are corrupt and unbelieving. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+1:15	abcn		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast between people who are pure and people who are corrupt and unbelieving. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1:15	n3wk		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	τοῖς & μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπίστοις, οὐδὲν καθαρόν	1	Paul speaks of sinners as if they were physically dirty. Alternate translation: “if people are morally defiled and do not believe, they cannot do anything pure” or “when people are full of sin and unbelief, nothing that they do is acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 1:16	abco		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast between what these corrupt people say (they know God) and what their actions show (they do not know God). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 1:16	i3l2			τοῖς & ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται	1	“how they live proves that they do not know him”
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 2:7	ym6x			τύπον καλῶν ἔργων	1	“as an example of one who does right and proper things”
 2:8	xy14			ὑγιῆ	1	This word has the same basic meaning as **uncorrupted** in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: **uncorrupted**, meaning, **without error**, and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound, whole**, meaning **correct**. Both terms refer to Titus’s teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms.
 2:8	xt6v		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo	ἵνα ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας ἐντραπῇ	1	This presents a hypothetical situation in which someone opposes Titus and then becomes ashamed for having done so. Alternate translation: “so that if anyone opposes you, he may be ashamed” or “so that when people oppose you, they may be ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-2:8	xy15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:8	xy15		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:9	xyz5		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis	δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	The Greek does not have **are**, but only **slaves to be subject to their masters**. We need to apply the verbal idea from verse 6 to here, which is **urge** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Exhort slaves to be subject to their masters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 2:9	ntp7			ἰδίοις δεσπόταις	1	“their own masters”
 2:9	abcc			ὑποτάσσεσθαι	1	“must obey”
@@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 2:10	h2n6			ἐν πᾶσιν	1	“in everything they do”
 2:10	f8jy			τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ, κοσμῶσιν	1	“they may make the teaching about God our Savior attractive” or “they may cause people to understand that the teaching about God our Savior is good”
 2:10	pn93			τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	“our God who saves us”
-2:10	xy16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:10	xy16		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:11	y44u				0	Paul encourages Titus to look for Jesus’ coming and remember his authority through Jesus.
 2:11	gp2z		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ἐπεφάνη & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of the grace of God as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 2:12	qy8k		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς	1	Paul speaks of the grace of God (2:11) as if it were a person who trains other people how to live holy lives. Alternate translation: “by which God trains us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-2:12	abce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:12	abce		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:12	lxb3			τὴν ἀσέβειαν	1	“things that dishonor God”
 2:12	n3k5			τὰς κοσμικὰς ἐπιθυμίας	1	“strong desires for the things of this world” or “strong desires for sinful pleasures”
 2:12	xy19			ἀσέβειαν & εὐσεβῶς	1	These terms are direct opposites, meaning **God-dishonoring** and **God-honoring**, respectively.
@@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 2:13	abcf		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης	1	Both **blessed hope** and **appearing of the glory** refer to the same event. This can be shown clearly. Alternate translation: “what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2:13	xyz7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys	τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	Both **our great God** and **Savior** refer to the one person, Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ, our great God and Savior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 2:14	niu4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν ἑαυτὸν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	This refers to Jesus dying willingly. Alternate translation: “gave himself to die for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-2:14	xy20		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:14	xy20		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:14	gxe7		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λυτρώσηται ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀνομίας	1	Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were setting slaves free from their evil master. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-2:14	xy21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+2:14	xy21		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 2:14	fjy1			λαὸν περιούσιον	1	“a group of people that he treasures”
 2:14	ii18			ζηλωτὴν	1	“who are eager to do”
 2:15	abc7			παρακάλει	1	“encourage them to do these things”
@@ -139,10 +139,10 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 3:1	xy25		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet	ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν	1	These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 3:1	in7u			πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι	1	“be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity”
 3:2	lug7			βλασφημεῖν	1	“to speak evil of”
-3:2	abc8		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀμάχους εἶναι	1	This can be stated positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+3:2	abcx		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἀμάχους εἶναι	1	This can be stated positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 3:3	m9zd			ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	“This is because we ourselves were once”
 3:3	me7b			ποτε	1	“formerly” or “at some time” or “previously”
-3:3	bl8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	“even we” or “we ourselves” This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians, referring to the time before they trusted in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:3	bl8e		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	“even we” or “we ourselves” This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians, referring to the time before they trusted in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:3	rrx9			ἦμεν & ἀνόητοι	1	“were thoughtless” or “were unwise”
 3:3	qt8f		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	Passion and pleasure are spoken of as if they were masters over people and had made those people into slaves by lying to them. Alternate translation: “We had allowed ourselves to believe the lie that various passions and pleasures could make us happy, and then we were unable to control our feelings or stop doing things we thought would give us pleasure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 3:3	xy27		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις	1	This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “various passions and pleasures had lied to us and so led us astray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 3:4	xy28		rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	It is important to mark the contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1-3) and the goodness of God (verses 4-7) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 3:4	ba5a		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification	ὅτε & ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	Paul speaks of God’s kindness and love as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “When God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 3:4	abcg		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns	ὅτε & ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ	1	The abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** can be stated as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-3:4	abch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:4	abch		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:5	n4ug			κατὰ τὸ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος	1	“because he had mercy on us”
 3:5	k1a6		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας	1	Paul combines two metaphors here. He is speaking of God’s forgiveness for sinners as if he were physically washing them clean from their sin. He is also speaking of sinners who become responsive to God as if they had been born again. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:6	fby9		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	οὗ ἐξέχεεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς πλουσίως	1	It is common for New Testament writers to speak of the Holy Spirit as a liquid that God can pour out in large amounts. Alternate translation: “whom God gave to us generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-3:6	xy24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:6	xy24		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:6	q9ze			διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν	1	“when Jesus Christ saved us”
-3:6	xy23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:6	xy23		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:7	di3g		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive	δικαιωθέντες	1	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “since God has declared us to be without sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 3:7	q1cm		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν, κατ’ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου	1	The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit the things promised, just as a person inherits property or possessions from a family member. Alternate translation: “we might expect to receive the eternal life that God has promised us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:8	j8md			ὁ λόγος	1	This message is the one just expressed in verses 4-7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus.
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 3:13	xy31		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μηδὲν αὐτοῖς λείπῃ	1	This can be stated positively: “so that they have everything that they need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 3:14	v7wg				0	Paul explains that it is important for all believers to provide for those who have needs.
 3:14	fw98			οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	Paul is referring to the believers in Crete. Alternate translation: “our own people”
-3:14	xy33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	Here, **our** includes Paul and Titus. The form should be either dual or inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:14	xy33		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	οἱ ἡμέτεροι	1	Here, **our** includes Paul and Titus. The form should be either dual or inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:14	tn24			εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας	1	“that enable them to help people who lack necessary things”
 3:14	mji4		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor	ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι	1	Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 3:14	xy32		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives	ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι	1	This can be stated positively: “in this way they will be fruitful” or “in this way they will be productive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@@ -195,6 +195,6 @@ front:intro	m2jl				0	# Introduction to Titus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction
 3:15	abci			ἀσπάζονταί σε	1	Here, **you** is singular–this is a personal greeting to Titus.
 3:15	k1sa			οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες	1	“All the people who are with me” or “all of the believers who are here with me”
 3:15	f4vc			τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει	1	Possible meanings are: (1) “the believers who love us” or (2) “the believers who love us because we share the same belief”.
-3:15	xy35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Here, **us** is probably exclusive and refers to Paul and the group of Christians with him. Paul is sending greetings from this group to the group of Christians that is with Titus on Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
+3:15	xy35		rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	Here, **us** is probably exclusive and refers to Paul and the group of Christians with him. Paul is sending greetings from this group to the group of Christians that is with Titus on Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
 3:15	kx83			ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	This was a common Christian greeting. Alternate translation: “May God’s grace be with you” or “I ask that God will be gracious to all of you”
 3:15	xy34			ὑμῶν	1	Here, **you** is plural. This blessing is for Titus and all of the believers there in Crete.